JP2021045630A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of securing impartiality of a game by preventing execution of a variation in a second special pattern much more than expected.SOLUTION: At timing t1 as start timing of a time-shortening final variation, a time-shortening flag is reset to off and a time-shortening extension flag is set to on. After that, when a second holding storage number reaches the upper-limit number at timing t2, the time-shortening extension flag is reset to off and a time-shortening state (high-base control) is completed. After the time-shortening final variation is completed at timing t3, variation display of a second special pattern for the second holding storage number is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36-8

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine has been proposed in which the time reduction count value is subtracted after the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed, and if the updated time reduction count value is 0, the time reduction flag is cleared to the off state (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-473333

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the timing for turning off the time saving flag does not take into consideration the symbol determination stop time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the normal variable winning ball device (electric tulip). Therefore, in the next fluctuation after the end of the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device is open, and the game ball wins in the normal variable winning ball device, and after the end of the time saving state, the number of times more than the upper limit of the number of holds is the second. There was a possibility that the fluctuation of the special figure would be executed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of ensuring the fairness of the game by preventing the fluctuation of the second special figure from being executed more than expected. The purpose.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to 73AK) capable of performing variable display by a first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) and a second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b). ) And
When the variable display in the second variable display means is executed, it is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the variable display in the first variable display means is executed (for example, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
A variable winning means (for example, a variable winning means) that changes from a closed state to an open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state, based on the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol being a predetermined result (for example, the normal symbol hits). Equipped with a variable winning ball device 15)
The variable winning means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state, a high base state) in which the variable winning means is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal state (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170).
A special state ending means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS013, step 73AKS028, and step 73AKS106).
When the special state is controlled, the first flag (for example, the time saving flag) is turned on, and in the final variable display in the special state, the first flag is turned off at the start of the variable display and the second flag is turned on. A flag management means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS012 and step 73AKS013) that turns on the (for example, the time saving extension flag) and turns off the second flag when a predetermined condition is satisfied is further provided.
The special state termination means terminates the special state based on the fact that the second flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means which is advantageous more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(2) In addition, in order to achieve the above object, other gaming machines according to the present invention may be used.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to 73AK) capable of performing variable display by a first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) and a second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b). ) And
When the variable display in the second variable display means is executed, it is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the variable display in the first variable display means is executed (for example, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
A variable winning device (for example, a variable winning device) that changes from a closed state to an open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state, based on the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol being a predetermined result (for example, the normal symbol hits). Variable winning ball device 15) and
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable winning device, the hold storage means (for example, the second hold storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the second variable display means as the second hold information.
A special state control means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170) that can control the variable winning device to a special state (for example, a time saving state or a high base state) in which the variable winning device is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal state.
A special state ending means (for example, CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS013, step 73AKS028, and step 73AKS106) for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state is provided.
The special state termination means is provided on the condition that the number of the second hold information stored by the hold storage means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 which is the upper limit number) in the final variable display in the special state. , The special state may be terminated (for example, CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS012, step 73AKS013, step 73AKS105, and step 73AKS106).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means which is advantageous more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
When the number of the second reserved information stored by the reserved storage means does not reach the predetermined number in the final variable display in the special state, the special state ending means is said to have the special state at the end of the variable display. The state may be terminated (for example, CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS028 and step S149).
With such a configuration, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (2) above
Flag management in which the first flag (for example, the time saving flag) is turned on when controlled to the special state, and the first flag is turned off when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the final variable display in the special state. The means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS105 and step 73AKS106) is provided.
The special state termination means may terminate the special state based on the fact that the first flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means which is advantageous more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display in the second variable display means, it is better when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display in the first variable display means. It tends to be advantageous to the player (eg, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
The special state termination means
The number of variable displays in the special state is counted, and when the number of variable displays in the special state becomes the first number, the special state can be terminated (for example, the processing of step 73AKS007, step 73AKS028, and step S149). Execute) with
The number of times of the small hit gaming state in the special state is counted, and when the number of times of the small hit gaming state in the special state becomes the second number, the special state can be terminated (for example, the process of step 73AKS025). To execute),
As the number of variable displays in the special state, the number of variable displays in the first variable display means and the second variable display means is counted (for example, the processes of step 73AKS002 and step S143 are executed).
As the number of times of the small hit gaming state in the special state, only the number of times of the small hit gaming state based on the variable display in the second variable display means is counted, and the small hit game state based on the variable display in the first variable display means is counted. The winning game state may not be counted (for example, the processing of step 73AKS022 and step 73AKS023 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control to a special state.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
An external signal transmitting means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the process of S29) for transmitting a signal (for example, a time saving medium signal) indicating that the special state is to the outside is provided.
The external signal transmitting means may be capable of transmitting a signal indicating that the special state is in the special state for a predetermined period of time even after the end of the special state (for example, FIG. 36-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible for an external device to preferably recognize a series of advantageous states.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation example of the 1st and 2nd special symbols in the 1st time saving state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the effect image of a round suggestion effect. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the effect image of the hold continuous notification effect. It is a timing chart of the hold continuous notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data table used when selecting the production mode of the round number suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the hold ream / round number suggestion effect selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the round number suggestion effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous notification effect 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd process of a hold continuous notification effect. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the effect image of a specific effect. It is a timing chart of a specific production. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd process of a specific effect. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the 1st display control example of the time saving remaining number of times. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer in order to execute the effect display of the number of remaining time reductions shown in FIG. 33-1. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the 2nd display control example of the time saving remaining number. It is a flowchart which shows the process which is executed by the effect control microcomputer in order to execute the effect display of the time saving remaining number of times shown in FIG. 33-3. It is an enlarged view of the display area in the vicinity of the time saving remaining number display part which shows the time saving remaining number update lock display control example. It is a display screen view of the effect display device which shows the specific notification example. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type table and the big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of promotion notification and arrival notification. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the holding quantity and the notification mode. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in the time saving medium when there is no special 1 hold. It is a figure which shows the mode of the variable display device, etc. in a section A, B and achievement effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in the time saving medium when there is a special 1 hold. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in the time saving medium when the right reel is not stopped. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the 1st time reduction change. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving fluctuation processing. It is a figure which shows the hit type table of the feature part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the hit probability of the feature part 33AK, and the hit type determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving final fluctuation time processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process during change. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the prize promotion notification. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving final variation effect processing. It is a timing chart in the time saving final fluctuation of the feature part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the hit type table of the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the hit probability of the characteristic part 73AK, and the hit type determination ratio. It is a timing chart which shows the opening mode of the V winning area in a small hit of a feature part 73AK. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of change start of the feature part 73AK. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving end determination processing of the feature part 73AK. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing of the feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 73AK. It is a timing chart until the end of the time saving state of the feature unit 73AK. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving end determination processing of the modification of the feature part 73AK.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as coin gaming machines may be used.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a game frame (not shown) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game frame that can be opened and closed. It has a glass door frame 2 formed in the shape of a frame.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball tray 4 for storing a game ball as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 3, and when the game ball as a game medium is launched from the hit ball launcher as a hit ball. A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 5 to be operated is provided. A game board 6 having a game area 7 on which the driven game ball can flow down is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. In the game area 7, some of the game nails are shown. The hitting ball launching device is driven by a launching motor, and the force for launching the game ball (launching intensity) is adjusted according to the rotation operation position of the hitting ball operating handle 5. As a result, the player can launch the game ball aiming at a desired place in the game area 7.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. In the game area 7, the first path of the flow path in which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front, and the first of the flow paths in which the game ball flows down. A second route different from the first route is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the left side of the game area 7, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second path is a path in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area 7, and therefore may be called a right-handed path.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of the game nails, and the like.

The game ball launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball striking handle 5 and driven into the game area 7 is guided along, for example, an array of game nails when guided to the left game area. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the game ball to the left game area.

The first start winning opening 13 is provided as a structure through which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9. The first start winning opening switch 13a is provided inside the first starting winning opening 13a as a switch for detecting the entered game ball.

A gate 32, a variable winning ball device 15, and a V-determined winning device 87 are provided as a structure in which a game ball hit into the right game area of the game area 7 can enter. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning opening 14 in which a game ball can be won. Further, as a switch for detecting the game balls that have entered each of them, a gate switch 32a is inside the gate 32, and a second start winning opening switch 14a is inside the second starting winning opening 14, and a V determination winning device. A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharging switch 15b are provided inside the 87, respectively. Hereinafter, the winning (entering) of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 13 is also referred to as the first starting winning, and the winning (entering) of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14 is also referred to as the second starting winning.

A game ball (starting winning ball) enters (wins) in the first starting winning opening 13 as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) It is a possible winning opening structure. A game ball (starting winning ball) enters (wins) in the second starting winning opening 14 as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) It is a possible winning opening structure.

The gate 32 is a gate structure through which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first starting prize opening 13 of the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening 13, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second starting prize opening 14 and the gate 32 of the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that the game ball struck in the right game area may enter the first start winning opening 13, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is struck in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls will enter them. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the game ball hit in the left game area may enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the game area will enter them.

The V-determination winning device 87 is a device for determining the V-winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a large hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-determination winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes through the inside. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width at which a game ball can pass in the front-rear direction, and walls are provided on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A portion is provided, and a guide path through which the game ball is guided is formed along the passage. At the center of the guideway, when a small hit occurs, for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 times opening period + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second) By repeating opening and closing, an operating port is formed as an opening in which a total of about 10 or more game balls can win a prize within a predetermined period of opening. The passage of the game ball in the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball alternately on both sides of the wall portion, so that when hitting to the right. , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) is formed in which the game ball slowly flows in the passage above the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87.

In the small hit game state, the V-judgment winning device 87 is used for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period elapses. Open control is executed. During such an open control period, the round number suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20 and the hold continuous notification effect shown in FIG. 21 are shown so that the player is less likely to feel that the open control is extended. Specific effects are feasible. In the V-judgment winning device 87, the portion of the taxiway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22, and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable portion 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable portion 872 and the fixed portion 873 as a taxiway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guideway and falls from the left end. To do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port opens in the taxiway, so that the game ball guided to the taxiway can fall from the operating port into the V-judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), the V-winning area 870 as a specific area is the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning area in which the game ball entering from the operating port can win. A ramp 871 is provided in the portion and further guides all the game balls that have entered from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 by a tilted path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening through which the game ball can enter, and the gaming ball entered from the V winning opening can be guided downward.

At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-shaped opening / closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state is provided. There is. The opening / closing member is driven by the solenoid 24, and can move forward and backward to open / close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 passes over the opening / closing member and opens in the vicinity of the downstream side of the V winning area 870. It is provided in a state where it can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and one game ball is in a small hit game state in which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened. When the player enters the V winning area 870 and wins a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a provided in the V winning area 870. When one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a in the small hit game state, the opening / closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball subsequently guided onto the V winning area 870 is within the winning ball area. Will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, as for the game balls that have entered the V-determination winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V-decision winning switch 15a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V-determining winning switch 15b.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a and the V-judgment winning switch 15b reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87 opened in the small hit game state closes the operating port and the game ball enters. It is considered impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is a predetermined game board 6 inside. It is discharged to the discharge passage. A V-determination discharge switch capable of detecting the discharged game balls is provided in the discharge passage, and all the game balls discharged by the switch are detected.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, the game ball wins in the V-winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , The condition for generating a big hit is satisfied, and the game is controlled to a big hit game state. Such a winning of a game ball in the V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 gaming balls are required on average without requiring any special operation. The structural design and control design are designed so that the player can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and when the gaming ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the gaming ball is always (100%) V-winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-handed promotion notification for instructing right-handed is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87. To.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, during the opening period of the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87, unless the player does not fire the game ball or the player hits the left side, hit the right side. For example, the (100%) game ball always enters the V winning area 870 and a big hit occurs.

In this embodiment, an example in which the V-determination winning device 87 is provided with a deceleration structure for a game ball is shown. However, without providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port capable of dropping the game ball is provided in a part of the taxiway of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration in which the operating port is opened 10 times may be used.

A V lamp 875, which is a light emitting body formed of an LED having a character shape of "V", is provided on a part of the front side of the V determination winning device 87. The V lamp 875 emits light basically in white when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state. The V lamp 875 is basically capable of emitting light in white, but the emission color can be changed to blue, red, and rainbow colors depending on the effect according to the game situation, such as when notifying a hold ream. Is. The V lamp 875 may be provided on the front surface portion or inside of the V determination winning device 87 as long as it is visible to the player. Further, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from that of the V determination winning device 87 (for example, a position near the V determination winning device 87).

The variable winning ball device 15 is a variable winning ball device that changes between an advantageous state (open state) for a player who can enter a game ball and a disadvantageous state (closed state) for a player who cannot enter a game ball. A tulip-shaped open wing piece (a pair of left and right shapes) is provided at the entrance, and a stopper member is provided above the open wing piece to limit the entry of the game ball when the open wing piece is closed. Has been done. The open wing piece is driven by the solenoid 16. The variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player by opening the variable winning ball device 15 for a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) when the display result of the normal symbol is hit. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that the game ball struck in the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V determination winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the game ball may enter either of the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the right game area enter them.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of displaying various effects such as an effect corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner as a variable display means for variablely displaying the special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A device 8a and a second special symbol display 8b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them are provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). On the display screen of the effect display device 9, various images such as the variation display of the effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each are displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area (design display area) for variable display of three decorative (also called decorative symbols) production symbols (also called decorative symbols) of "left", "middle", and "right". Is formed.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display according to the variation display, and the second special symbol display 8b is the second. When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, if the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator. If only one special symbol display is provided, only one starting winning opening may be provided. Further, even if only one special symbol display is provided, two (plural) starting winning openings are provided, and when a game ball wins a prize in any of the starting winning openings, one special symbol display is provided. You may control the variable display. Further, when two (plural) special symbol indicators are provided, one start winning opening is provided, and the two special symbol indicators are variablely displayed in a predetermined order (for example, the two special symbol indicators are variablely displayed for each start winning prize). Control may be performed (such as switching a special symbol display).

Below the game area 7, a jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided. In the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a right-handed game ball is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area due to the planted state of the game nail.

The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided with a jackpot whose front surface is covered with a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, the solenoid 21 tilts the door forward about the bottom to reveal the jackpot. (Opens). Inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting the entered game ball is provided. The winning route to the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided by a game nail or other structure so that the winning ball can be won in the big winning opening only when the game ball is driven into the right game area. It is restricted. It should be noted that regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening.

When a game ball wins in any of the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and the V-judgment winning device 87, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded accordingly. Is paid out. The prize ball may be paid out even when the game ball passes through the gate 32. Further, at least one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be prevented from being paid out even if the game ball wins.

At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts on the outside of the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

The jackpot is when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, respectively. Occurs in. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening 13, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening 14, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b.

The big hit also occurs when the game ball that entered when the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is open due to the small hit gaming state enters the V winning area 870. Hereinafter, when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, it is referred to as V winning. The small hit is a hit at which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value addition, and a big hit can be generated on condition that the V winning is given. In the V-determination winning device 87, the gaming state in which the operating port is open is referred to as a "small hit gaming state". Then, in the small hit game state, the big hit generated based on the V winning of the game ball is called "big hit via small hit". On the other hand, the jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value addition, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is repeatedly and continuously controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is open (the jackpot is opened) is called a round. Repeated continuous control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a predetermined end condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) has elapsed. It will be closed according to the establishment of the opening end condition) that the winning ball has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

In the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball After passing through (including winning) the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as the starting winning area), the start condition of the variation display (for example, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the fact that the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and a concept including that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display).

Further, with respect to the variable display in which the start condition is not yet satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, within a predetermined upper limit number. The storage of information on the variable display for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied is called hold storage. The term "holding memory" is also used to indicate (specify) the information held on hold. Hold memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first hold memory as the hold memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 13. With respect to the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14. When a jackpot occurs in the state where such a first hold memory or a second hold memory exists, the hold memory that existed before the occurrence of the jackpot is maintained as it is, and is displayed in a variable manner after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Used for.

When the second start prize is generated in the second start prize opening 14, even if there is a hold memory of the first start prize, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second start prize is prioritized and executed. Will be done. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second display composed of one indicator that displays the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. A special symbol hold storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol holding storage display 18b lights the second special symbol holding storage display 18b every time there is a valid start prize, and every time the variation display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b is turned on. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b is turned off.

Above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a first special symbol hold storage display consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold storage number. A vessel 18a is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of indicators that are lit each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variablely displaying normal symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. It is a hit when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), and the variable winning ball device 15 is limited to a predetermined time from a closed state which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a stick controller 122 that can be grasped by the player and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right). The stick controller 122 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation by a player holding the operation stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and pushing and pulling the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) is provided, and inside the operation stick of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 125 is provided. Is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, for example, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. Inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120, a push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 is provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player changes by firing a game ball so as to properly use "left-handed" aiming at the left game area and "right-handed" aiming at the right game area according to the game situation. The game state and the production state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player is seated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first strikes the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the game is switched from left-handed to right-handed and aimed at the open big hit variable winning ball device 20. .. After the jackpot game state is completed, a right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a display such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9.

During the big hit game state, the game is performed in which the open big hit variable winning ball device 20 is aimed by right-handed hitting. During the jackpot game state, a right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the end of the big hit game state, if the time is shortened, which will be described later, the game is continued by right-handed. After the jackpot game is completed, if the time saving state is reached, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, right-handed promotion notification is also performed during the time saving state. If the time is not shortened after the jackpot game state ends, the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 by switching from right-handed to left-handed. Play the game as you do. If the time is not shortened, a left-handed promotion notification (also referred to as a left-handed notification) is provided on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to return to left-handedness and play the game. You may.

During the time saving state after the big hit game is completed, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handed. If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14, and the display result is a big hit (a big hit with a special symbol), the game is performed aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 while hitting right. Further, if the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 and the display result is the small hit display result, the operating opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small hit game state, so that the V is left hit. The game is performed aiming at the judgment winning device 87. At the start of the small hit game state, the small hit start notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state is started. Further, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit is executed before the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened according to the small hit, as will be described later, depending on the specific timing (depending on the game situation). Right-handed promotion notification is also performed at the start timing of the hit display or a predetermined timing before the small hit display is executed.).

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-judgment winning area 870, and is detected. When a V prize occurs, a big hit via a small hit occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V-winning has occurred. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, a small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the big hit game state, so that the player plays the game aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 while hitting right.

Further, when the game is performed aiming at the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit game state, the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area (not shown) other than the V winning area 870. Does not cause a big hit. When the V prize does not occur during the small hit game state in this way, the V prize failure notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V prize has failed. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, a small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 while hitting right. When the time saving state ends, the game is switched from right-handed to left-handed so that the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving end notification for notifying that the time-saving has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to the left-handed play and play the game are performed.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. In the hit type table, the jackpot generation condition, the control state after the jackpot (game state), the number of open times in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the open time of each round in the jackpot are shown for each hit type. In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are: symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, and via small hit 5 ( 4) R time saving jackpot is provided. The number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened is shown in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit.

The small hit occurs when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning opening 14 provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and the display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit symbol. Judgment as to whether or not to make the display result of the special symbol a small hit symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small hit determination of the special symbol). When a small hit occurs, a small hit game state is set, and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening is 10 and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small hit game state is the same as before the small hit. In the small hit, the prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87 during the small hit game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small hit game state, and about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open, a game ball is won in the operating port, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (V-winning), a big hit occurs. To do. A big hit via such a small hit is called a big hit via a small hit as described above. The big hit via small hit includes 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time short big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time short big hit via small hit. Is done. The small hit linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time saving big hit is called the first small hit. The small hit linked so as to be a 9 (8) R time saving big hit is called a second small hit. The small hit linked so as to be a 5 (4) R time saving big hit is called a third small hit.

On the other hand, a big hit that is directly generated by a variable display of a special symbol without going through a small hit is called a symbol big hit. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot that is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot.

In this way, as a big hit, a symbol big hit that is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and a small hit that is generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol are generated by V winning. Includes big hits via small hits. Each of the big hits via the symbol big hit and the big hit via the small hit is a big hit that is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and is named as a time saving big hit. An advantageous state advantageous for the player in the present embodiment includes opening the jackpot variable winning ball device 20.

Here, the time saving state will be described. The time saving state is an example of a special gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player. The time saving state is a control state in which the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol (effect symbol) is shortened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal state). In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase.

In the time saving state, by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 is facilitated ( It is controlled to a high base state (higher approach, higher frequency).

Here, the "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls according to the winning of the number of shot balls. The "high base state" is a state in which active control is performed to increase this ratio. On the other hand, a state in which such control is not performed is a "low base state". Such control is realized, for example, as a control for increasing the occurrence of a start winning prize that triggers the start of fluctuation of a special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip) can be opened by increasing the opening frequency and the number of times of opening, or by lengthening the opening time of one time. It can be realized as a control that facilitates winning. Such control is also called "electric chew support control". That is, the high base state is variable by increasing the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 that triggers the fluctuation of the special symbol is opened. This is a control state in which winning a prize in the winning ball device 15 is facilitated (higher approach, higher frequency). "Denchu support control" is generally called by the abbreviation "Den support", and the abbreviation "Den support" may be used in this embodiment as well.

Further, high-base control (electric chew support control) will be described in detail. High-base control (electric chew support control) is a control that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) so that the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening). Control), control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (ordinary electric accessory) (opening time extension control), and , Control is performed to increase the number of times the variable winning ball device is opened, which triggers a change in the special symbol (control to increase the number of times of opening). When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device, which triggers the fluctuation of the special symbol, is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win a prize (it becomes easier to satisfy the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9).

In addition, the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened four times (4R). For 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 16 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 15 times, and the player can open the big winning opening in the same way as the big hit with the design 15R time reduction. I feel it is a type. 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) on condition of V winning after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). Is. For 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 5 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 4 times, and the player has the same big hit as the symbol 4R time saving big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel it is a type.

In the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol are 5 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one considers that the game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one may generate a big hit via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. There is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot, basically, the time saving state (including the electric support state) is continued until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the variation of the second special symbol, It is necessary to hit the right side to allow the game ball to enter the gate 32 to open the variable winning ball device 15, and in that state, to win the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15. Such a variable winning ball device 15 It takes time to win the game ball, and the first special symbol that has been held and stored may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display of the times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After a big hit other than the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times, which is the end condition of the time saving state, is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times may generate a jackpot via a small hit as compared with the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be raised.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 7 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of fluctuations is feasible. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is a normal state, the first starting winning opening 13 is provided so that a winning can be made from the first path. Therefore, it is better for the game ball to flow down the first path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting prize than the game ball flowing down the two routes. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big hit game state, the open big hit variable winning ball device 20 is provided so that a prize can be won from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a big hit than the game ball flowing down. Further, in a specific state such as a small hit game state, the V-judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second path. Therefore, the one in which the game ball flows down the second path is the first path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of generating a big hit than the game ball flowing down.

Not limited to such comparison of advantages, for example, another winning opening (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) is the first route. And the second route, and in the low base state as a normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second route, and the high base state, the big hit game state, and the small From another point of view, such that in other states such as the winning game state, the second path is easier to win the variable winning opening than the first path, in the normal state, the game medium uses the first path. A configuration may be adopted in which the flow down is advantageous for the player, and in other gaming states, the flow down of the game medium on the second path is advantageous for the player.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or processes) the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputer mounted on a substrate other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the start winning time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

Further, the detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the V winning switch 87a, the V judgment winning switch 15a, and the V judgment discharging switch 15b are used for game control. The input driver circuit 58 given to the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a solenoid 22 for opening and closing the V determination winning device 87 (movable portion 872), and a V winning determination winning device 87 ( The solenoid 22 that opens and closes the area 870 movable part 87), the solenoid 24 that opens and closes the V winning area 870 (opening and closing member), and the output circuit 59 that drives according to the command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31. Has been done. The payout control board 37 controls the payout of balls by controlling the ball payout device 97.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variable display of normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

The effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via a relay board 77 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In addition to controlling the variation display of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and the display control of the V lamp 875 are performed via the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board is performed. Various production controls such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 via the 70 are performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 121 via the I / O port unit 105. input. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the I / O port unit 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operator's operation action with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the I / O port unit 105. And enter. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random 1: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 2: Type of big hit (type, symbol 15R time saving big hit, symbol 4R time saving big hit, via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit, via small hit 9 (8) R time saving big hit, and via small hit 5 (4) Determine the R time saving jackpot type) and the jackpot symbol (for determining the jackpot type, for determining the jackpot symbol). (3) Random 3: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 4: Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5).

In this embodiment, as the big hits in the specific game state, the symbol 15R time saving big hit, the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R time saving big hit, the small hit via 9 (8) R time saving big hit, and the small hit It includes multiple types of via 5 (4) R time saving jackpot. Therefore, when a big hit is decided or a small hit is decided based on the value of the hit judgment random number (random R), it is based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random 1). Therefore, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the determined big hit is invalid unless a V prize is generated. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a jackpot symbol.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a small hit symbol.

Further, as for the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and any of the variation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3). Determine the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-shortening state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

Further, such fluctuation pattern types include a fluctuation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs (for example, a fluctuation pattern type in which an effect related to the small hit is executed) and a small hit. Includes non-selectable variation pattern types (for example, variation pattern types in which an effect unrelated to small hits is executed). Such a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, and includes a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed. Therefore, when a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding such a small hit is executed is executed, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player. The variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit is made can be selected both when the small hit is made and when the small hit is not made, and when the small hit is made, it is better than when the small hit is not made. Is also set to be selected at a high rate. As a result, even if the fluctuation pattern type can be selected when a small hit occurs, the small hit may not occur. Therefore, the player is aware in advance that the small hit will be obtained from the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed. It can be prevented from being stolen. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern types that cannot be selected when a small hit is, for example, a fluctuation pattern that is not related to the small hit and suggests that the big hit is directly made without going through the small hit. Therefore, by making it unselectable when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the effect of the fluctuation pattern and the display result from becoming complicated. The fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is made is set so that the fluctuation pattern set at a specific fluctuation time is selected based on the correspondence with the open control of the V determination winning device 87. .. If the fluctuation pattern in which such a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed can be executed when the small hit occurs, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the small hit at the time of displaying the fluctuation. it can. Further, the player can easily cope with the game peculiar to the small hit game state that the game ball needs to enter the V determination winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to obtain a big hit. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to escape the advantageous state of allowing the game ball to enter the V determination winning device 87.

Further, the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is made may not be limited to a specific fluctuation time. Further, the variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is obtained does not have to execute a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern may be provided separately depending on whether the hit is a small hit, a miss, or a big hit. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is not divided into the fluctuation pattern when it is a small hit, when it is a miss, and when it is a big hit, and when any fluctuation display result is obtained, the type of fluctuation pattern to be selected The range of may be the same.

In addition, instead of setting the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern separately and determining the fluctuation pattern by a two-step lottery process, the fluctuation pattern is not provided and only the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is used in the one-step stage. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 5 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.

FIG. 5B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure hit determination table. The second special figure hit judgment table is a data table for making a big hit judgment and a small hit judgment for the second special symbol, and a big hit judgment value to be compared with random 1 and a small hit judgment value are set. It is a table that is. The upper row in FIG. 5 (B) is the big hit determination table section, and the lower row in FIG. 5 (B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper part of FIG. 5B indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of FIG. 5B indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit.

When the CPU 56 detects a start prize (first start prize) in the first start prize opening 13 or a start prize (second start prize) in the second start prize opening 14, the CPU 56 random numbers occur at a predetermined timing. The count value (random R) of the circuit 503 is extracted. For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the first special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the first special symbol is hit. To decide. For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the second special symbol is hit as a jackpot. To decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is with any of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. Deciding to make a small hit also means making a tentative decision to make a big hit via a small hit (it is described as a tentative decision because it is not controlled by a big hit unless a V prize occurs during the small hit). ..

It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to the big hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do it. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether to make the stop symbol by the variable display of the second special symbol a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

The first special symbol is set so as not to be determined to be a small hit, but the first special symbol may be set to be determined to be a small hit with a predetermined probability.

5 (C), 5 (D), and (E) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5C is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 5D is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), there are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 for determining the jackpot type, which are "symbol 15R time saving jackpot" and "symbol 4R time saving jackpot". The jackpot judgment value corresponding to each is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time saving jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (C) and 5 (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time reduction jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol. The judgment value corresponding to "15R time saving big hit" is also set as the judgment value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the jackpot design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the large hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 5 (E), the numerical values to be compared with the random 2 value for determining the large hit type are "via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit" and "small hit". A jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "via 9 (8) R time saving big hit" and "via 5 (4) R time saving big hit" is set. However, the big hit types determined in the big hit type determination table via small hits are the first small hit (which is 16 (15) R time saving big hit) and the second small hit (which is 9 (8) R time saving big hit). , It is a provisional big hit type associated with each of the third small hits (5 (4) R time saving big hits), and is invalid unless a V prize is generated in the small hit game state.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, the number of fluctuation displays controlled in the time saving state (high base state) is different, the first time saving state (variation display 1 to 5 times), and the second time saving state (variation). Due to the existence of a plurality of types of time-saving states such as (display 7 to 11 times), the game in the time-saving state is rich in variety and the interest of the game is improved.

Next, an execution mode of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state of various jackpots will be described. Here, a time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit will be described as a typical example. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing in tabular form an example of an execution mode of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit.

4R Time saving After the end of the big hit game state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the first time saving state controlled to the time saving state over a relatively small number of fluctuation display times (1 to 5 times). Regarding the display, comparing the case where the hold memory of the first special symbol exists before the occurrence of the jackpot game state and the case where the hold memory of the first special symbol does not exist before the occurrence of the jackpot game state are compared. , As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the execution balance modes of the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state are different.

FIG. 6A shows an example of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is one hold storage of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control. FIG. 6B shows an example of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is no hold storage of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first hold memory or the second hold memory is controlled to the jackpot game state in the presence of the first hold memory or the second hold memory, the hold memory existing before the control to the jackpot game state is changed to the jackpot game. The memory state is continued during the state and is carried over to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is used for the variable display after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the start of the first time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the 4R time saving jackpot, the first special symbol based on the hold memory that existed before the control to the jackpot gaming state. When there is a hold memory, the start prize of the game ball to the second start prize opening 14 for variable display of the second special symbol to be executed preferentially has not yet been made. As the second variation display, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the hold memory of the first special symbol carried over from before the occurrence of the jackpot game state is executed. In the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the 8R time-saving big hit, a game is performed in which the game ball is entered into the gate 32 and the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handedness. In addition, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize to the second starting winning prize opening 14 can be executed.

From the start of the time saving state until the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, when the holding memory of the first special symbol exists, the variable display of the first special symbol is based on the holding memory. Is executed. In FIG. 6A, one of the first special symbols that existed before the control to the jackpot game state after the start of the time saving state until the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 occurs. An example is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed once based on the hold memory of. In FIG. 6A, it is the second time after the start of the time saving state, based on the fact that the variation display based on the starting prize to the second starting winning opening 14 is executed once for the second time after the start of the time saving state. An example in which the time saving control is completed is shown in the variable display.

As for the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14, four reserved storage information can be stored as described above. Therefore, the variable winning ball device 15 in the electric support state, which is executed after the start of the first time saving state and before the end of one execution of the variation display based on the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, for example. As shown in FIG. 6A, a maximum of four second reserved storage information can be generated in the open control state of. In this embodiment, in the case of the first time saving state, the fluctuation display having a somewhat long fluctuation display time is based on the first start prize to the second start prize opening 14 so that the second hold storage information is likely to be accumulated. Is executed. It should be noted that such a variable display with a long variable display time may not be executed.

After that, when the second hold storage information is stored until one execution of the variation display based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is completed, for example, the third time in FIG. 6 (A). ~ As shown in the 6th variation display column of the 2nd special symbol, the variation display based on a maximum of 4 2nd hold storage information is executed, and the small hit lottery with a winning probability of about 1/7 is held for the second time. Only the number of stored information can be executed. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, the player's expectation can be raised regarding the occurrence of a big hit via the small hit based on the second reserved storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, when there is no hold memory of the first special symbol based on the hold memory that existed before the control to the big hit game state at the start of the time saving state, the 4R time saving big hit In a short time state after the end of the big hit game state, a game is performed in which a game ball is hit to enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball cannot enter the first starting winning opening 13. Since the game state is set, as shown in FIG. 6B, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning from the first variation display to the second start winning opening 14 can be executed. Also in this case, as in the case of having the reserved storage in FIG. 6 (A), a maximum of four second reserved storage information as shown in FIG. 6 (B) can be generated. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, the player's expectation can be raised regarding the occurrence of a big hit via the small hit based on the second reserved storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

As for the end condition of the first time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state of the 4R time reduction jackpot, as described above, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. It is established when the variation display is executed a total of 5 times.

As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the start of the time saving state, after the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold storage of one of the first special symbols existing at the start is executed once, When the second special symbol variation display is executed for the second time, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and the second special symbol variation display count is executed once, so that the end condition is set. It is established, and the control of the first time saving state is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 6B, when the hold memory of the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed from the first time, 1 When the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is executed once in the second variation display, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the control of the time saving state is terminated.

4R Time-saving jackpot jackpot After the game state ends, the end condition of the first time-saving state is that the number of times the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is executed once, or the total of the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is set to be established when the number of times is executed 5 times. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 6A, even if the hold memory of the first special symbol exists at the start of the first time saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the first time saving state. However, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, is executed the same number of times (once) as when the hold memory of the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the first time reduction state, so that the first time reduction is performed. The state ends.

Further, for example, even if there are a maximum of four reserved memories of the first special symbol at the start of the first time saving state, in the first time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the four reserved memories is displayed. Is executed, at the start of the first time saving state, the first special symbol is executed the same number of times (once) as when the hold storage of the first special symbol does not exist, so that the first time saving state ends.

In this way, the end condition of the first time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the 4R time-saving big hit is that the variable display number of the second special symbol is executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Since it is set to be established when the total number of times of the variation display is executed 5 times, the first special symbol is held and stored at the start of the first time saving state, and the first is not. During the control period of the 1-time reduction state, the number of times the variation display of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, can be executed can be the same, so that there is a difference in the advantages and disadvantages for the player in the time-saving state (high base state). This can be prevented and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the end condition of the first time saving state defined by the total number of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number of times that the variable display is performed by the first hold storage. Since it is set to the total number of times (4 times) and the specific number of times (1 time) that the predetermined variation display is executed for the 2nd special symbol, the variation due to the 1st hold storage in the 1st time saving state. Even if the display is performed a certain number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from having an advantage or disadvantage due to the first reserved storage information, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

For jackpot types other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the minimum fluctuation display number "1" in the time-saving state in the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is replaced with "7", and the maximum in the time-saving state in the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot described above is replaced with "7". The variation display number "5" is replaced with "11". Therefore, even for jackpot types other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the presence or absence of the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol at the start of the first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is the same as in the case of the 8R time-saving jackpot. And, regardless of the amount, the second time saving state continues until the same 7 times of variable display of the second special symbol is executed. As a result, for the jackpot types other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the same effect as that obtained for the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot can be obtained.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the number of time reductions (electric support) after the big hit is set to a relatively small number, as described above, the player depends on the number of first reserved storage information immediately after the end of the big hit game state. It is preferable not to reduce the number of time reductions (electric support) that would be disadvantageous to the customer.

7 and 8 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. 7 and 8 show the relationship between specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified content of the command. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 7 and 8 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), it controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands that indicate the off display result, the big hit type, the big hit display result for each small hit type, and the display result including the small hit display result.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is the normal state (low base state). The command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

The command C0XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating the first hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second hold storage number designation command for designating the second hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a hold storage number designation command for specifying the hold storage number after the subtraction when subtracting the hold storage number, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, a hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the hold storage number is subtracted by 1 may be used.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the winning result is a big hit, whether or not the small hit is made, and the judgment result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. The command C601 (H) is a V-winning designation command for designating that there was a V-winning. The command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command for designating that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) to the V determination winning device 87 has been detected.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 is provided with a first hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the first special symbol. In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2), and , Random number for determining fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 55 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2), and , Random number for determining fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13, the CPU 56 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and puts them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Execute the process of saving (storing). Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored (stored) in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the second hold storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) in the area. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored (stored) in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

In this way, storing information about the start winning prize as described above in the hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the hold storage buffer in advance, but are described later in the variation pattern setting process. It may be extracted at (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). Random number update processing for initial values (update processing for the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) and the like are executed.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination discharging are performed via the input driver circuit 58. The detection signals of the switch 15b are input, and their states are determined (switch processing: S21).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number and a small hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). ). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, and the accessory winning switch 25a (S30).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S311). Then, depending on the internal state, any of the processes S300 to S310 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 13. A first hold storage buffer to be stored, and a second hold storage buffer for storing hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as a random number for jackpot determination obtained based on the start prize to the second start winning opening 14. Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of stored storages (4 for the first reserved storage data and 4 for the second reserved storage data) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed.

Regarding the following description of the hold storage, it may be indicated that the information regarding the start winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer as "hold storage". Further, it is mentioned above that the numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer may be referred to as the first reserved storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as the second reserved storage information. That's right.

The processes of S300 to S307 are as follows.
The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a small hit, and determining the type of small hit when the display result is a small hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) is a process of determining the variation pattern and controlling the start of timing of the variation time timer.

The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The big winning opening pre-opening process (S305) is a process of controlling the opening of the big winning opening in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 when the big hit game state is reached. The large winning opening opening process (S306) performs control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening, and the like. It is a process. If the conditions for closing the big prize opening are satisfied and there are no remaining rounds, the process shifts to the big hit end process. The jackpot end process (S307) is a process of performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the jackpot game state.

The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is a process of controlling the opening of the operating port in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit gaming state is reached. The small hit opening process (S309) is a process of confirming whether or not the game ball has V-winned in the V-winning area 870 in the V-judgment winning device 87, and transmitting a V-winning designation command when the V-winning is won. , It is a process of performing a process such as a process of transmitting a small hit end specification command when the end timing of the small hit is reached.

The small hit end process (S310) is a process for shifting to the big hit game state when the game ball wins a V in the V winning area 870 in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 (transmission of a big hit start designation command, big hit display). Set the time, set the jackpot opening mode, set the process flag transition for the pre-opening of the jackpot opening, etc.), while specially without shifting to the jackpot game state when the V prize is not awarded. This is a process for executing a process for shifting to the symbol normal process (S300).

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1221. When the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process for determining in advance the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected start winning of the first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as reserved storage information, and then the variable display is started. When the condition is satisfied, at the timing when the variable display is started, the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) that starts the variable display is changed based on the reserved storage information in the special symbol normal processing (S300). The determination of whether or not the display result is the jackpot display result and the determination of the jackpot type are performed based on the jackpot determination value set corresponding to the various random number values described above and the jackpot type determination value. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including the determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S301) is changed to the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Do it based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a decision, the timing before the variable display based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, specifically, the game ball is first started. At the timing when the start winning prize is entered in the winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (the timing when the hold storage information is stored), the hold storage information storing various data obtained at the time of the start winning is pre-read, and the pre-read hold Based on the stored information, the determination of whether or not a big hit is made, the determination of whether or not a small hit is made, the determination of the type of big hit, and the determination of the fluctuation pattern type are performed in advance corresponding to the various random values described above. The prize-winning effect processing for pre-reading determination is executed based on the set jackpot determination value, jackpot type determination value, and fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the effect control microcomputer 100 predicts the variation display result in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on various determination results at the time of starting winning, the effect symbol is displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big hit (possibility of a big hit) during the variable display.

Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1216), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1217). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and sets the value of the first hold storage number counter in the EXT data to specify the first hold storage number. Control is performed to send a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S126 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.), the first Every time the start winning opening 13 is started, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of S1216 to S1219 is executed and a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening 13, a symbol designation command, a variable type command, and a first start prize designation command are generated. And a set of four commands of the first hold storage number specification command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state (S1221). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 3), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 4) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing similar to the winning effect processing as described in S1215 for the detected start winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1226), and also controls to transmit the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S1227). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), and sets the value of the second hold storage number counter in the EXT data to specify the second hold storage number. Control is performed to send a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.), the second Every time a start winning prize is given to the starting winning opening 14, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of S1226 to S1229 is executed and a start prize is generated in the second start prize opening 14, a symbol designation command, a variable type command, and a second start prize designation command are generated. And a set of four commands of the second hold storage number specification command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (S51). If there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no hold storage data in the hold storage buffer in S51, the process for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command (S80) is performed, and then the process ends. On the other hand, when there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer (S52). If there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) The data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is set according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed by using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Is done. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer. Is performed.

Under the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second hold storage exists in the second hold storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second hold storage can be displayed. It is executed with priority given to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first hold storage.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. Further, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like.

Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (S59). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 56 reads random number 1 (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passage process and S1224 of the start port switch pass process and stored in the hold storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value (see FIG. 5) and a small hit judgment value (see FIG. 5) with a random number for big hit judgment, and if they match, it is decided to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program that executes the process of determining. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5 (A), the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5 (B). Then, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in S60), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. ..

If it is decided to make a big hit in S61 (Y in S61), a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5 (C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (when "second" is indicated), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (D) is selected (S74), S75. Proceed to.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. The decision is made (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the jackpot determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating "second" (variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is the data indicating "second" (variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 5 (B). Is used to determine which small hit determination value the value of the large hit determination random number (random 1) matches, thereby performing the small hit determination process (S76). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 5 (B) (Y in S76), it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the large hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 5 (E) is selected (S79), and matches the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the large hit type stored in the random number buffer area. The jackpot type corresponding to the value to be used is determined as the jackpot type via the small hit (S80). Then, it shifts to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, the data indicating the jackpot type determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time saving jackpot", the data indicating the jackpot type is set. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit", "03" is set in the provisional big hit type buffer different from the big hit type buffer as the data indicating the big hit type. When the jackpot type is via small hit 9 (8) R time saving jackpot, "04" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is via small hit 5 (4) R time reduction jackpot, "05" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit are V prizes in the small hit gaming state. If there is no big hit, there is data that becomes invalid and is temporarily set.

In S82, a stop symbol of a special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5", and "9", which is the small hit symbol selected and determined in S80 according to the small hit type, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is the jackpot symbol selected and determined in S75 according to the jackpot type, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) (S79).

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process.

In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and ends the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, if the jackpot flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

When the jackpot flag is set, such as when it is determined that the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot or the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is set, the CPU 56 sets the time-saving flag, which is a flag set when the time-saving state is controlled. When it is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and either the jackpot start 1 designation command or the jackpot start 2 designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the determined jackpot type. Process for sending the command (big hit start designation command) (S135).

As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is symbol 4R time saving jackpot, the jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is symbol 15R time saving jackpot, the jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

Further, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot control timer (S136). After that, in the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, the large winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large winning opening is opened and the round is started.

Further, according to the type of jackpot specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each jackpot type stored in the ROM 54 described above is referred to, and the number of releases (for example, 15 times). , Or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and other data indicating the opening mode are set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S138), and the process ends. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the pre-opening processing of the large winning opening.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133 described above, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit opening control timer used for the small hit opening control by referring to the small hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 (for example, Data indicating an opening mode such as (10 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and interval time between openings is set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening preprocessing.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is due to the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). When the time saving flag is not set in S142, the time saving state is not set, and the process proceeds to S152 described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving state is set, so that the total value of the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol in the time saving state is counted. The total time reduction counter as a counting means is updated by -1 subtraction (S143).

The total time reduction counter that is subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when it is controlled to the first time reduction state after the 4R symbol time reduction jackpot in the jackpot end processing of FIG. When it is controlled to the second time saving state after the big hit, it is set to 11 times by S168, and by S143, it is subtracted and updated every time the variation display which is the off display result is executed once. The total time reduction counter is used to determine both whether or not the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied and whether or not the end condition of the second time reduction state is satisfied.

Next, based on confirming whether or not the special symbol pointer is the data indicating the "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end of the variation display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S146). The special figure 2 time reduction counter, which is subtracted and updated in S146, is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when controlled to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state after the end of the big hit game. In the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time reduction state, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time reduction state. Will be done. The special figure 2 time reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 every time the variation display which is the display result of the second special symbol being removed is executed once.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter becomes "0", one of the end conditions of the first time reduction state is satisfied, or one of the end conditions of the second time reduction state is satisfied. Since it is time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state that is being executed. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not "0", in order to confirm whether or not one other end condition of the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied. Then proceed to S148.

In S148, in order to confirm whether or not the end condition of the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state being executed is satisfied based on the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time-saving state. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter that has been subtracted and updated in S143 has become "0" (S148). If the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0" in S148, the process proceeds to S152, which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time reduction counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

In S149 and S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol has become the number of end conditions, and by S148, the first special symbol and the first special symbol and Executed to end the running 1st time saving state or 2nd time saving state when it is determined that the total number of fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol has reached the number of times of the end condition. ..

In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set time reduction counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to the end of the time saving condition based on the number of fluctuation display times in the time saving state, a process for transmitting the normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151), and the process proceeds to S152.

In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S152), and the processing ends. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

In such a special symbol stop process, according to S142 to S151, when the first time is shortened, the execution of one deviation variation display of the second special symbol and the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 When either of the execution of the out-of-times variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, according to S142 to S151, in the second time saving state, the second special symbol is executed 7 times and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed 11 times in total. When any of the above is satisfied, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer set before the jackpot end process is executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (S162). If it has not passed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed, in the current big hit game state, it is confirmed whether or not the type of the big hit to end is the 8R time saving big hit based on the data indicating the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 ( S163).

When the type of jackpot that ends in S163 is the symbol 4R time reduction jackpot, in order to control to the first time reduction state, as the end condition of the first time reduction state, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to "1" (second special). Set the data of the symbol variation display once (S164), and set the data of "5" (corresponding to the total variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 times) in the total time reduction counter (S165). ). Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

When the type of the jackpot ending by S163 is not the symbol 4R time saving jackpot, it means that the type of the jackpot ending is a jackpot type other than the symbol 4R time saving jackpot, and the second time saving state is controlled in order to control the second time saving state. As the end condition of, the data of "7" (corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol once) is set in the special figure 2 time reduction counter (S167), and "11" (the first special symbol and the first special symbol and) are set in the total time reduction counter. Set the data (corresponding to the total variation display of the second special symbol 11 times) (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

In S170, a time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S171), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

As a result, it is controlled to the first time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit, and is controlled to the second time saving state after the end of the big hit type big hit game state other than the symbol 4R time saving big hit. The end conditions for the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are individually defined by the number of times the variation is displayed only for the second special symbol and the total number of times the variation display is opened for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. To.

In such a jackpot end process, in S164 and S165, after the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot is completed, the second special symbol is executed once and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The control is set to the first time saving state until any one of the execution of the deviation variation display of 5 times in total is satisfied. In addition, according to S167 and S168, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot type other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the execution of the 7-time loss variation display of the 2nd special symbol and the total of 11 of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The control is set to the second time saving state until one of the execution of the out-of-times variation display is satisfied.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S308). In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 56 operates the movable portion 872 in the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode set in S140 of FIG. 13, and operates the V determination winning device 87. The mouth opening operation is started (S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command indicating that the small hit game state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Next, the CPU 56 sets a V-determined winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small hit as the end condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V-winning number is set. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening processing (S309) (S413).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening processing, the CPU 56 updates the small hit opening control timer by -1 subtraction (S430). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter that counts the number of V winnings in S435, which will be described later, is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" by S413 in FIG. 15, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counting value becomes "0". When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit release control timer set in S140 of FIG. 13 has timed out (timer value = 0). (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled according to the time value of the small hit release control timer based on the small hit release mode set in S140 of FIG. The movable portion 872 is operated in the open state, and a process for opening and closing the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering from the V winning opening into the V winning area 870 which is open inside the V judgment winning device 87 is detected, the V winning is won. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is in the ON state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it is when the V prize is detected, and the V prize flag set when the V prize is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting the V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball has been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening / closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning region 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V, the V-winning opening of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and then the game that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87. All the balls are guided to the winning ball region and detected by the V determination winning switch 15b.

On the other hand, when it is not in the ON state in S434, it means that the V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15b is in the ON state (S438). When it is in the ON state in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not in the ON state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, a process for down-counting the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter set to "10" by S413 in FIG. 15 to "-1" (S439) and transmitting a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is performed. (S440). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 is detected after the V winning ball is detected, and enters the determination winning device 87. It becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls played.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small hit is satisfied because the number of V winnings per small hit reaches the upper limit value. When the small hit release control timer times out in S432, it means that the small hit release end condition is satisfied because the small hit release control is completed. At these times, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in the closed state, and closes the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is being opened according to the opening mode of the small hit, the counting value of the V-judgment winning number counter is increased. The V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit release control timer times out, the V determination winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit release control in the small hit opening mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period, which is the V-winning valid period after the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed, is set in the V-winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (small hit end processing). The value corresponding to S310) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the time counting of the specific period, which is the valid period of the V prize after the V determination prize device 87 is closed, is started. Since the specific period, which is the valid period of the V prize, is set in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V prize area later than the time when the game ball normally passes in some time signature, the game ball Can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally tries to win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning validity period timer by -1 subtraction (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is used to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. Determines whether or not is in the ON state (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is turned on in S444, it means that the V prize is detected during the V prize valid period, and the V prize flag indicating that the V prize is detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting the V prize designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V prize has been generated.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has been completed. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening / closing member to return the V winning region 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hit game state, if the right-handed hit is made according to the right-handed promotion notification described later, the game ball is allowed to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. The game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 always wins the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the jackpot flag is set in S449, and the jackpot game state is controlled.

Next, the CPU 56 converts the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot temporary type buffer in S81 into the jackpot type buffer according to the fact that it is determined that the data will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. Formally memorize (S450). Then, the time saving flags set at that time (the first time saving flag and the second time saving flag set in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14) are temporarily reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Further, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the opening count (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval are set according to the jackpot type. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as time (large winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V prize occurs in the small hit game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big hit game state does not occur. Therefore, in S81, the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer is deleted (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S457), and the processing ends. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). For example, in the command analysis process, when a variation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103. Further, in the command analysis process, when the display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103. In addition, when various effect control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set. Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (S705). In the effect control process process, among the processes according to the control state, in order to perform various effects such as an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704. Select the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers such as random numbers for selection determination of various effect contents is executed (S706). After that, it shifts to S702.

In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when the variation display time specified by the variation pattern command elapses, or the symbol confirmation designation command is received. When this is done, the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped. By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits from the game control microcomputer 560 and responds to the effect control command received, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect control computer 100. By controlling the effect device such as the speaker 27, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped. May be good. The variation pattern command is a command consisting of data that can specify the length of the variation time and the information necessary for specifying the variation display mode such as the variation display result. The variation display is controlled to be executed at the variation time corresponding to each variation pattern command. Further, the stop symbol when executing the effect control for fluctuating the effect symbol is determined based on the display result designation command and determining whether the effect symbol is an outlier or a big hit.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the processes of S500 and S501, and then performs any process of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed, but is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol. Both the control related to the effect and the control related to the effect synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process process. Further, in the effect control process process, an effect corresponding to (synchronized) the variation display of the normal symbol is also executed in a manner in which the variation display of the special symbol can be displayed in parallel.

Hitting promotion effect processing (S500): Based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game state is confirmed, and the ball hitting promotion effect according to the game state is executed. The hitting ball promotion effect is an effect of promoting the hitting of the game ball into at least one of the first path (left-handed path) and the second path (right-handed path) in the game area 7. Specifically, the hitting promotion effect includes a right-handed promotion notification effect for promoting the driving of a game ball into the second path (right-handed path), and the hitting promotion effect includes the right-handed promotion. The notification effect and the effect of the left-handed promotion notification for promoting the driving of the game ball into the first path (left-handed path) may be included.

In the right-handed promotion notification effect, for example, in a specific display area of the effect display device, a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed character such as "right-handed" is continuously displayed together with a right-pointing arrow image. It is done by doing.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the basis for driving a game ball, and as a hitting promotion effect, a second path (right) is based on a state in which left-handed promotion notification is not executed and right-handed promotion notification is executed. The driving of the game ball into the first route (left-handed route) is promoted (right-handed), and conversely, the driving of the game ball into the first route (left-handed route) based on the state in which the right-handed promotion notification is not executed (left). An example of effect control that promotes hitting) will be described.

As the hitting ball promotion effect, the effect control may be performed in which both the left-handed promotion notification and the right-handed promotion notification are used properly according to the game state. Further, as the hitting promotion effect, the effect control may be performed in which both the left-handed promotion notification and the right-handed promotion notification are used properly according to the game state.

Look-ahead processing (S501): This is a process of storing the hold storage information (hold information) corresponding to the hold storage information possessed by the game control microcomputer 560 and making the hold storage information usable for the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect is the content of the change display of the special symbol based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold memory information before the turn of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold memory information arrives. It is a production technique such as determining what will happen to the variable display of the special symbol in the future and giving a notice at a stage before that. For example, when it is shown that the hold storage information is a small hit or a symbol big hit, a notice effect (see FIG. 21) called a hold continuous notification effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect. In the following, the hold storage information targeted for the look-ahead effect will be referred to as “target hold storage information”. Further, the hold display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is referred to as "target hold display".

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect start process (S801) at the time of variation.

Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that the effect at the time of variation, which is an effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, is started. Corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command, the effect pattern of the effect at the time of fluctuation is selected, and the time of the effect time timer for measuring the effect time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect during fluctuation (S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (S802): Controls the switching timing and the like of each state constituting the effect pattern, and monitors whether or not the effect time timed by the effect time timer has expired. Then, the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect stop process (S803) at the time of fluctuation in order to end the effect at the time of fluctuation based on the end of the effect time or the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. Update to value.

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S803): Controls to stop the effect during fluctuation and display the effect result corresponding to the variation display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

Big hit display processing (S804): When a big hit (first big hit or second big hit) occurs, a control or the like for performing a fanfare effect as an effect such as a big hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Display control is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (S805).

Round processing (S805): Display control during a big hit round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S807).

Round post-processing (S806): Display control between big hit rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (S805).

Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

Small hit display process (S808): When a small hit occurs, a fanfare effect as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a small hit is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Display control such as control is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S809).

Small hit opening process (S809): In the small hit, various effect controls are performed while the V determination winning device 87 is open. Then, when the V determination winning device 87 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S810).

Small hit end effect processing (S810): The effect display device 9 performs effect control to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Further, in the small hit game state, when the V winning switch 87a detects the V winning of the game ball and it is determined that the V winning has occurred, the V winning effect control for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed. When a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) in order to shift to the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) because the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled by each of the above processes, the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the effect result corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. The effect control CPU 101 recognizes, for example, the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variation display executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result specification command, and produces the effect at the time of variation. Determine the result. Further, in the effect control process process, the S500 confirms the execution status of the effect control process, and the hit ball promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of hitting promotion effects including a high base state right-handed promotion notification, a small hit right-handed promotion notification, and a large hit right-handed promotion notification as the hitting promotion effect. The high-base state right-handed promotion notification is a ball-striking promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14) by hitting right in the high-base state. is there. The small hit right-handed promotion notification is a ball-striking promotion effect for making a right-handed hit and aiming for the game ball to enter the V-determined winning device 87 (V-winning area) in the small-hit game state. The jackpot right-handed promotion notification is a ball-striking promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 (big winning opening) by hitting right in the jackpot game state.

High-base state right-handed promotion notification, small hit right-handed promotion notification, and big hit right-handed promotion notification suggest and promote right-handed hitting such as "right-handed" together with a right-pointing arrow image. It may be executed using the same image that is continuously displayed. In other words, even if the right-handed promotion notification corresponds to the type of promotion notification in the high base state, the promotion notification in the small hit, or the promotion notification in the big hit, it is not possible to specify. Good. The right-handed promotion notification is an image that continuously displays a character image such as "right-handed" that suggests and promotes right-handedness together with a right-pointing arrow image. The small hit right-handed promotion notification may be displayed as a yellow image, and the large hit right-handed promotion notification may be displayed as a red image. In this embodiment, the high-base state right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a blue image, the small hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a yellow image, and the large hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed as a red image. To explain. Further, the size of the image used for the effect may be different depending on the type of the ball striking promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for the production may be different depending on the advantage for the player. As an example, small hit right-handed promotion notifications are promoted using a small image, high-base state right-handed promotion notifications are promoted using a medium-sized image, and large hit right-handed promotion notifications are large. The promotion notification may be performed using the image of. As for the high-base state right-handed promotion notification, the promotion notification may be performed using a large image in the same manner as the big hit right-handed promotion notification.

Next, as an example of the effect during the big hit game state displayed on the effect display device 9 when the "design big hit" or the "big hit via the small hit" is obtained based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14. The V combo production (VCOMBO production) will be described. The V-combo effect is performed during a predetermined period during a predetermined round during the big hit game state when the "design big hit" or "big hit via small hit" is obtained based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14. , It is an effect of notifying the number of prize balls paid out (outgoing balls) in a big hit game state at a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect of notifying the number of prize balls paid out in a plurality of times in stages.

FIG. 20 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of the round suggestion effect. In FIG. 20, an example of the round suggestion effect is shown with the passage of time, and an image having little relation to the round suggestion effect is omitted. The round suggestion effect is a round in the big hit game state executed via the end of the small hit by the display image of the effect display device 9 when it is determined that the big hit is caused by the occurrence of the V prize in the small hit game state. It is a production that suggests numbers.

20 (A) to 20 (E) show an example of a round suggestion effect. In the small hit game state, the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V determination winning device 87. When a V-winning occurs in such a state, a V-shaped V-winning image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 20 (A). As a result, a V winning notification indicating that a winning has occurred is given. The display of the V winning image 94 is continued until the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to the closed state.

As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, when the V winning image 94 is displayed in response to the occurrence of the V winning, the aura images 95 (95A to 95E) imitating the aura (aura) are V winning. It is displayed in an effect image-like display mode that clings to the periphery of the image 94. As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the aura image is composed of a plurality of colors such as aura image white 95A, aura image blue 95B, aura image green 95C, aura image red 95D, or aura image rainbow 95E. Displayed in the selected color. In the figure, the color of the aura image 95 is indicated by the color characters in parentheses (the color characters are not actually displayed, but may be displayed). As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the color of the aura image 95 can be changed and displayed in a predetermined plurality of stages such as white → blue → green → red → rainbow during the small hit game. The color of the aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of winnings in the V-determination winning device 87.

The color of the aura image 95 may not change or may change during the small hit game. The aura image 95 can suggest the expected degree of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state to the color. As for the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds, the correspondence relationship of "white <blue <green <red <rainbow" is predetermined. As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation of a large number of rounds in the jackpot game state from the color of the aura image 95. For example, the player can recognize that the number of rounds is more likely to be larger when the aura image red 95D is displayed than when the aura image blue 95B is displayed.

By executing the round number suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 20, the V winning aura image 95 is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 after the game medium has entered the specific area. Since the production mode of a predetermined production such as the production can be changed, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production without delaying the progress of the game.

Further, since the round number suggestion effect by the V-winning aura image 95 is executed in connection with the effect of notifying the V-winning by displaying the V-winning image 94, the effect further improves the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, since the production mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination prize device 87, the round number suggestion effect and V The player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have entered the determination winning device 87.

Further, the production mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V winning aura image 95 corresponds to the number of rounds (advantage of the number of rounds) in the big hit game state controlled based on the V winning in the small hit game state. Since the number of rounds of the jackpot can be changed step by step, the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, so that the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

FIG. 21 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of the hold continuous notification effect. FIG. 22 is a timing chart of the hold continuous notification effect. A hold continuous notification effect as a special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. In FIG. 21, an example of the hold continuous notification effect is shown in (A) to (D) according to the passage of time. FIG. 22 shows the effect control timing of the period from the start of the small hit game state to the start of the big hit game state based on the V prize.

The hold ream is a hold memory information that exists when a big hit occurs, and there is a hold memory information that will be a big hit in the future, and it exists after the end of the big hit game state and before the big hit occurs. The next big hit occurs continuously within the range of the reserved storage information that existed at the time of the big hit, such that the next big hit occurs continuously within the range of the reserved storage information. It refers to a big hit (holding villa). Since the small hit is a big hit via the small hit based on the occurrence of the V prize, the reserved storage information of the small hit is the reserved storage information that will be the big hit in the future.

The hold ream in this embodiment is determined by targeting the hold storage information of the second hold storage information when a big hit occurs in the time saving state (high base state). When the second reserved storage information exists, the second reserved storage information has priority over the first reserved storage information and is used for the variable display. Therefore, in the time saving state (high base state), the reserved storage information of the second reserved storage information is used. If there is hold storage information of a small hit or a symbol big hit inside, continuous big hits may occur, so that these hold storage information is determined to be the storage information of the hold sequence.

After the small hit game state is started as shown in FIG. 22, when a V prize is generated during the execution of the effect of the opening process (S809) of FIG. 19, as shown in FIGS. 21 (A) and 22. The V-shaped V-winning image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9 over a relatively short predetermined period. As a result, the V prize notification indicating that the V prize has occurred is given. When the hold continuous effect is executed, the following effects are executed over the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

In the small hit game state, when a predetermined time elapses after the V prize is generated, as shown in FIGS. 21 (B) and 22, the entire screen of the effect display device 9 turns black (darkens) and nothing is displayed. The blackout display that appears not to be displayed is executed as a basic effect by the opening process (S809) and the small hit end process (S810) in FIG. Instead of the effect, it is continuously executed until the end of the small hit game state (the first process of the hold continuous notification effect). The blackout display may be a difficult-to-see effect that changes the visibility of a predetermined image to a difficult-to-see state lower than the reference state, or an effect that surprises the player. For example, the entire display screen is black. Instead of darkening to a one-color image, an image of a predetermined color such as translucent black is superimposed on the front side of the normally displayed production image (effect image such as a production pattern, a character, and a background image). By doing so, an effect of lowering the brightness of the image of the entire display screen to darken the image as a whole or an effect of giving a special feeling to the player may be performed.

Then, after the end of the small hit game state, the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit (the effect of notifying the start of the big hit and the broken line in the figure) executed as the basic effect by the big hit display process (S804) of FIG. Instead of (shown by), the hold continuous notification as shown in FIGS. 21 (C) or (D) and 22 is executed (second process of the hold continuous notification effect). Specifically, when there are three totals of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit in the reserved storage information, "+3 BONUS" as shown in FIG. 21 (C). Is displayed, the hold continuous notification is performed. When there are four totals of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit in the reserved storage information, the characters "+4 BONUS" are displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (D). By doing so, the pending continuous notification is performed. Further, although not shown, if there are two totals of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit in the reserved storage information, the characters "+2 BONUS" are displayed. By doing so, the pending continuous notification is performed. As described above, in the hold continuous notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information after the end of the big hit game state, and the number is notified.

In this way, the number of the hold storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the number of the hold storage information determined to be the small hit are identifiablely notified in the hold continuous notification effect, so that the hold memory is advantageous for the player. By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the amount of information, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

As shown in FIG. 22, such a hold continuous notification is executed until a specific period elapses at the beginning of the production of the jackpot game state, such as before the start of the first round of the jackpot game. After the hold continuous notification is executed, the inter-round process (S805) of FIG. 19 starts the production of the first round of the jackpot game state, for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 22. In this way, the hold continuous notification effect is executed across the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

The reason why the blackout display is executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed is as follows. When the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the round number suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20 is not executed. When the V-judgment winning device 87 having the deceleration structure described above is used, the game ball slowly flows down the passage on the V-judgment winning device 87. Of the open times, at what point the V prize will occur, and at what point the maximum number of 10th game balls, which is the end condition of the open state, will enter the V judgment winning device 87. Variations occur with each small hit. As a result, the timing at which the small hit game state ends varies depending on the occurrence of the small hit. When performing an effect in which the effect changes irregularly according to the number of game balls entering the V-judgment winning device 87, as in the effect suggesting the number of rounds shown in FIG. 20, the player feels uncomfortable. It will not be a directing. However, as an effect display during the period from the start of the small hit game state to the end of the small hit game state, for example, the ending is reached after a certain period of time, and the content of the effect changes according to the passage of time. If it is assumed that a certain effect is executed, the effect state at the end of the small hit will be different for each small hit, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. It becomes difficult to make adjustments to make the effect state at the end of the small hit uniform for each occurrence. Therefore, in order to execute the production of the small hit game that does not give the player a sense of discomfort, the production by the blackout display in which the production content does not change is executed. That is, the blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hit game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to preferably execute the hold continuous notification effect for the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

Based on the fact that at least one of the hold storage information determined to be a symbol big hit or the hold storage information determined to be a small hit is included when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state. Since the hold continuous notification effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

Further, when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the V prize notification shown in FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the hold continuous notification effect can be executed. Therefore, the V prize can be executed in the small hit game state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production when the occurrence occurs.

In addition, at least one of the hold storage information determined to be a symbol big hit or the hold storage information determined to be a small hit when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state is included. Since the hold continuous notification effect can be executed based on the above, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information after the end of the big hit game state, and the number is notified. As a result, the player can specifically recognize the number of reserved storage information that is advantageous for the player, so that the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect, for example, "+3 BONUS" in FIG. 21 (C) and "+ 4 BONUS" in FIG. 21 (D), the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information is Which effect mode is used to execute the hold continuous notification effect because the effect mode of the special effect to be executed differs between when the number is less than the predetermined number (3 pieces, etc.) and when the number is more than the predetermined number (4 pieces, etc.). Can draw the attention of the player.

In the hold continuous notification effect of FIG. 21, an example of executing the blackout display after executing the V winning notification for a short time is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blackout display may be executed without notifying the V prize. Further, when executing the hold continuous notification effect, other images such as a predetermined still image or a moving image that executes a repetitive operation for a short period of time may be displayed without executing the blackout display. Further, the blackout display period may be a fixed period. The hold continuous notification effect may be executed until the round effect of the big hit after the end of the small hit game state. When the blackout display period is set to a fixed time when the hold continuous notification effect is executed until the big hit round effect, the blackout display of the fixed period is executed from the time of V winning, so the period is black. The out display period may be a fixed period, and the end time of the blackout display may be indefinite until during the round production of the big hit. Further, the hold continuous notification effect may be executed at the time of V winning, or may be executed during the opening period of the V determination winning device 87 after V winning.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a data table used when selecting an effect mode of the round number suggestion effect. FIG. 23A shows a V-aura color change effect pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect patterns that change the color of the V-winning aura image 95 in the round number suggestion effect. FIG. 23B shows a V-aura color change effect pattern selection table used for selecting an effect pattern for changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 in the round number suggestion effect.

In FIG. 23 (A), the number of winnings (1 to 10) to the V-determination winning device 87 during the small hit game state is shown for each of the effects patterns shown in the first to eighth patterns. ), The color of the V winning aura image 95 is set. For example, in the sixth pattern, the 1st and 2nd patterns are white, the 3rd to 6th patterns are blue, the 7th to 8th patterns are green, and the 9th to 10th patterns are red. The data is set. The number of winnings to the V-judgment winning device 87 is the total value of the game balls detected by the V-judgment winning switch 87a and the V-judgment winning switch 15a. As the number of winnings to the V-judgment winning device 87, the value of the game ball detected by the V-judgment discharge switch 15b may be used.

As for the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds, the correspondence relationship of "white <blue <green <red <rainbow" is predetermined, so in each production pattern, white → blue → as the number of winnings increases. A color change pattern is set so that the color can change in the order of green → red. Iridescent is a color that includes other colors such as blue, green, and red. In this way, as the number of winnings increases, the number of rounds is expected to change to a higher color, which gives the player a sense of expectation while the V-judgment winning device 87 is open in the small hit game state. It can be increased, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel when the opening control is extended.

Unlike other effect patterns, the eighth pattern is an effect pattern in which the rainbow colors are set for all of the 1st to 10th items, and the colors do not change and are fixed to the rainbow colors. This is because the rainbow color is used as a special color suggesting that the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit has been confirmed. As an effect pattern suggesting that the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit is confirmed, for example, an effect pattern in which the color can change in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow may be used. Good.

FIG. 23 (B) shows the correspondence between the types of big hits via small hits and the first to eighth patterns of FIG. 23 (A). In FIG. 23 (B), 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit are targeted for effect control. As one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, a total of 100 numerical values of the random number SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 99) for selecting the V combo effect pattern are allocated to each of the corresponding first to eighth patterns. Has been done.

In FIG. 23 (B), “via small hit 5 (4) R time saving big hit <small hit” corresponds to the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of a large number of rounds such as “white <blue <green <red <rainbow”. With the correspondence relationship of "via 9 (8) R time saving big hit <via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit", the selection rate of the production pattern with high expectation of the number of rounds for the final 10th color will be high. Data is set in. In FIG. 23 (B), the eighth pattern is set to be selectable only in the case of 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit. As a result, when the round number suggestion effect is executed in the 8th pattern (all the 1st to 10th pieces are rainbow colors), it is confirmed that the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit is confirmed. It is possible to suggest to. The eighth pattern may be selectable for a big hit other than the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the presence / absence of a hold continuous notification effect. The hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table is stored in the ROM 102.

In the hold ream notification effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 24, for effect control when the total number of hold reams for the symbol 15R time-saving big hit and the 16 (15) R time-saving big hit via the small hit is 0 to 4, respectively. A total of 150 numerical values, which are random numbers SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 149) for determining the presence / absence of pending continuous notification as one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, are "executed (executed)" and "executed not". (Do not execute) ”.

In this way, the hold continuous notification effect can be executed as a hold storage information and a target that can be a big hit in which the big winning opening opens 15 times. In addition, the hold continuous notification effect may be executed for the hold storage information that can be a big hit of other types. In the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, when the target hold storage information is 0 or 1, "execution available" is not determined, and only "no execution" is determined. Has been done.

In addition, in the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set so that "execution available" can be determined when the total of the target hold storage information is two or more, and the data is the target. The data is set so that as the number of reserved storage information increases, the ratio of determining "execution available" increases. As a result, the hold continuous notification effect is executed according to the number of hold storage information that can be a big hit, which is an advantageous number of rounds for the player, such as the symbol 15R time saving big hit and the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit. Since the ratios are different, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to how many times the jackpot, which is an advantageous number of rounds, is executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

Further, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that there are a plurality of hold memory information that can be a big hit, so that the effect can further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the hold continuous notification effect determination table, when the total number of hold stations for the symbol 15R time saving big hit and the 16 (15) R time saving big hit via the small hit is 2 or more among the big hit types, the hold continuous notification effect is performed. The data is set to run. As a result, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can store a plurality of hold storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous for the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types. By making it recognizable, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

In addition, since the hold storage information that can be a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds such as the symbol 15R time saving big hit and the 16 (15) R time saving big hit is used as the execution target of the hold continuous notification effect, the hold continuous notification effect can be performed. When executed, the player naturally has a high expectation that the big winning opening will be opened 15 times, which is the most advantageous big hit game state for the player, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production.

Next, the hold consecutive / round number suggestion effect selection process for determining whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification effect and the round number suggestion effect and selecting the effect type will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a hold ream / round number suggestion effect selection process.

The hold ream / round number suggestion effect selection process of FIG. 25 is included in the process of setting various effects in the effect symbol variation start process (S801 of FIG. 19). In the pending consecutive / round number suggestion effect selection process, first, whether or not the variation display result of the variation display executed this time is a small hit display result is determined (displayed) based on the display result specification command received at the time of this variation. The result may be determined based on a identifiable variation pattern command) (S851). The received display result designation command is stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103, and determines whether or not the small hit display result is obtained depending on whether or not a command for specifying the small hit display result is stored in the area indicating the variation display executed this time. To judge.

If the result is not a small hit display result according to S851, the process ends. On the other hand, when the small hit display result is obtained by S851, the current second hold storage information stored in the look-ahead process (S501) of FIG. 19 (hold storage information based on the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14). ) Is acquired (S852). Then, based on the acquired second hold storage information, it is confirmed whether or not there is hold storage information that is a symbol jackpot (symbol 15R time saving jackpot) that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect (S853), and the target of the hold continuous notification effect. It is confirmed whether or not there is a hold storage information (which can be a 16 (15) R time saving big hit via a small hit). Next, SR2 is extracted, and based on the confirmation information in S853 and S854, the hold continuous notification effect is executed based on the hold storage information in the current second hold storage information using the hold continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. Whether or not to do (whether or not to execute) is determined (S855).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the player is controlled to the small hit game state, if the player hits the right player according to the right-handed promotion notification, a V prize is generated with a probability of approximately 100% and the player is controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, the hold storage information that becomes a small hit is also determined as the hold storage information that becomes a hold sequence together with the hold storage information that becomes a big hit.

When the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is determined by S855, the hold continuous notification effect information (for example, the notification target hold) which is the data to be used when executing the hold continuous notification effect in response to the current variation display. The number of stations, whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed, etc.) are stored in a predetermined effect data storage area (S857), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is decided by S855 not to execute the hold continuous notification effect, it is decided to execute the round suggestion effect (color change effect of the aura image) (S858). Next, the type of the big hit via the small hit is confirmed based on the display result specification command confirmed in S851, SR3 is extracted, and the operation is executed using the V aura color change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 23 (B). The production pattern of the round suggestion effect is selected and determined (S859). Then, as data to be used when executing the round suggestion effect with the determined effect pattern, the number of rounds is suggested, such as storing the effect pattern data stored in the V aura color change effect pattern table as shown in FIG. 23 (A). The effect information (for example, the round number suggestion effect pattern, the presence / absence of the round number suggestion effect, etc.) is stored in a specific effect data storage area (S860), and the process ends.

When it is decided to execute the hold continuous notification effect when the variation display becomes the small hit display result, the hold continuous notification effect is executed based on the data stored in S857. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the hold continuous notification effect when the variable display becomes the small hit display result, the round number suggestion effect is executed based on the data stored in S860. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine that does not have the hold continuous notification effect, S858 may be executed after S855.

It should be noted that the round number suggestion effect may also be executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed. In addition, the round number suggestion effect is not always executed when the hold continuous notification effect is not executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the round number suggestion effect by a predetermined lottery when the hold continuous notification effect is not executed. You may. Further, it may be decided whether or not to execute the round number suggestion effect by a predetermined lottery, and when it is decided to execute the round number suggestion effect, the hold continuous notification effect may not be executed. In this way, the hold continuous notification effect and the round number suggestion effect may be executed with priority given to either one, or both may be executed without giving priority to either one.

Next, the round number suggestion effect processing for executing the above-mentioned round number suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the round number suggestion effect processing. The round number suggestion effect processing of FIG. 26 is configured and executed as a part of the processing during opening of the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

In the round number suggestion effect processing, first, the round number suggestion effect information (round number suggestion effect pattern, presence / absence of execution of the round number suggestion effect, etc.) stored in S860 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S840). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the decision to execute the round number suggestion effect is made based on the information regarding whether or not the round number suggestion effect is executed obtained in S840 (S841). If the decision to execute the round number suggestion effect is not made in S841, the process ends. On the other hand, when the decision to execute the round number suggestion effect is made in S841, it is the time when the V specific winning ball detection designation command output when the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 is detected is received. Check whether or not (S842).

If the command is not received in S842, the process ends. On the other hand, when a command is received in S842, the winning number counter as a counting means for counting the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 is updated by adding +1 (S843). Then, based on the effect pattern of the round number suggestion effect acquired in S840, the aura image 95 is displayed in the color corresponding to the number counted by the updated winning number counter (S843). By displaying the aura image 95 in the color corresponding to the number in S843, the round number suggestion effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed according to the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 is executed. It will be. The V-winning image 94 starts to be displayed based on the reception of the V-winning designation command in the opening process (S809) of the small hit effect. When the V-winning occurs, the V-specific winning ball immediately after the V-winning is generated. Since the detection designation command is received, the aura image 95 corresponding to the V winning image 94 is displayed by S843 in the color determined by S844 immediately after the V winning is generated. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the round number suggestion effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed is executed.

Next, the first process of the hold continuous notification effect for executing the above-mentioned hold continuous notification effect during the small hit game will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first process of the hold continuous notification effect. The first process of the hold continuous notification effect of FIG. 27 is configured and executed as a part of the process of opening the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

In the first process of the hold continuous notification effect, first, the hold continuous notification effect information (the number of hold stations to be notified, whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S861). Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to execute the hold continuous notification effect based on the information regarding whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed obtained in S861 (S862). If the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is not made in S862, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is decided in S862 to execute the hold continuous notification effect, the V winning ball transmitted when the V winning ball to the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a is transmitted. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the detection designation command (S863).

If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the reception of the V prize detection designation command in S863, the process ends. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the V prize detection designation command in S863, the processing during opening of the small hit effect (S809) and the small hit are based on the information regarding the number of pending stations to be notified acquired in S861. The blackout display (S864), which is executed until the end process (S810) is completed, is started (S864), and the process is ended. As a result, the blackout display as shown in FIG. 21B is executed until the end of the small hit game.

Next, the second process of the hold continuous notification effect for executing the above-mentioned hold continuous notification effect during the jackpot display will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second process of the hold continuous notification effect. The second process of the hold continuous notification effect of FIG. 28 is configured and executed as a part of the jackpot display process (S804 of FIG. 19) of the jackpot effect.

In the second process of the hold continuous notification effect, first, the hold continuous notification effect information (the number of hold stations to be notified, whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S871). Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to execute the hold continuous notification effect based on the information regarding whether or not the hold continuous notification effect is executed obtained in S871 (S872). If the decision to execute the hold continuous notification effect is not made in S872, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is decided in S872 to execute the hold continuous notification effect, the hold continuous notification mode is +2 BONUS (in the case of two target hold stations) based on the information regarding the number of hold stations to be notified acquired in S871. ), + 3BONUS (when the number of target reserved stations is 3), and +4 BONUS (when the number of target reserved stations is 4) are selected (S873). Then, in the hold continuous notification mode selected in S873, the execution of the hold continuous notification to be executed over a predetermined period of the jackpot display effect period is started. As a result, for example, the hold continuous notification as shown in FIGS. 21 (C) and 21 (D) is executed.

[V-winning image A variant example of holding continuous notification effect by aura color]
Next, a modified example of performing the hold continuous notification effect by the V winning image aura color will be described. In FIG. 21, an example of executing a hold continuous notification effect based on character information such as “+3 BONUS” is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect may be performed by using the aura image 95 capable of changing the color as shown in FIG.

As a hold continuous notification effect using the aura image 95, the aura image 95 displayed accompanying the V winning image 94 is shown in FIG. 20, for example, as the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 increases. The color of the aura image 95 may be changed as described above, and the color of the aura image 95 may be changed to a specific color such as rainbow color as the pending continuous notification as described above. Such a hold continuous notification effect displays an aura image based on the fact that the hold storage information includes at least one of the hold storage information that is a symbol big hit and the hold storage information that is a small hit. By making it possible to change the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode, the hold continuous notification effect may be executed.

When such a hold continuous notification effect is executed, the aura is based on the fact that the hold storage information includes at least one of the hold storage information that is a symbol big hit and the hold storage information that is a small hit. Since the production mode of the effect of displaying the image can be changed to a specific mode, the player can recognize that the hold storage information includes the hold storage information that becomes the big hit via the symbol big hit or the small hit. As a result, the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

[Modification example of change in production mode of hold continuous notification effect]
Next, when executing the hold continuous notification effect, only the case where the total number of the hold storage information which is the symbol big hit and the hold storage information which is the big hit via the small hit is a plurality of, and the hold storage information which is the big hit via the small hit An example will be described in which the effect mode of the hold continuous notification effect differs depending on the case where there are a plurality of items.

Regarding the second hold storage information when the jackpot game state is reached, there are cases of the first hold storage type in which only the hold storage information that becomes the symbol jackpot exists, and the hold storage information and the small hit (via the small hit) that become the symbol jackpot. There may be a case of a second hold ream type in which both of the hold storage information that becomes a big hit) exist, and a case of a third hold ream type in which only a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) exists. Such a plurality of types of hold reams are all called hold reams, but when notifying that there is a hold ream as a hold ream notification effect, the hold ream notification is performed in a different production mode depending on the hold ream type. May be executed. For example, in the case of the first hold series type, the hold series notification is performed with a katakana such as "+3 bonus", and in the case of the second hold series type, the hold series notification is performed with English characters such as "+3 BONUS". In the case of the third hold series type, the hold series notification may be performed with a hiragana such as "+3 bonus". In addition, when notifying that there is a hold ream, an image such as characters related to the hold ream may be displayed in different colors depending on the type of the hold ream. In addition, when notifying that there is a hold ream, different character images are displayed according to the hold ream type (the display may be associated with the number of hold reams, or the character image alone may be displayed). An image such as a character related to the character may be displayed. In addition, for each of the first hold series type to the third hold series type, there are a plurality of production modes such as "+3 bonus", a production mode such as "+3 BONUS", and a plurality of types such as "+3 bonus". From the production modes, the production mode may be selected and determined by lottery. In that case, the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed may be different for each of the hold series types of the first hold series type to the third hold series type.

By executing such a hold continuous notification effect, it is possible to make the effect mode of the hold continuous notification effect to be executed different depending on the hold sequence type. Therefore, the hold continuous notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes. Ruka can draw the player's attention. In addition, when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is different for each of the first hold series type to the third hold series type, the game is played depending on which effect mode the hold continuous notification effect is executed. Can draw people's attention.

[Modification example of limiting control of hold continuous notification effect] Next, after executing the hold continuous notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold stations, all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold sequence notification effect is exhausted. An example of restricting (prohibiting) the execution of the hold continuous notification effect will be described.

When executing the hold continuous notification effect when there are a plurality of hold storage information that becomes a symbol big hit and hold storage information that becomes a small hit (big hit via a small hit) in the second hold storage information when the big hit game state is entered. In addition, when the jackpot game state in which the hold continuous notification effect is executed ends, the jackpot targeted for the hold continuous notification is executed, and the hold continuous notification effect is executed even in the jackpot game state, the hold continuous notification effect is executed. Whether the notification effect is continuously executed for the hold storage information of the hold ream that was the notification target in the previous jackpot game state, or the hold storage information of the hold ream based on the newly generated hold storage information is targeted. It becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is newly executed as a result, and the production becomes unclear.

Therefore, after executing the hold continuous notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold stations, the execution of the hold continuous notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold sequence notification effect is exhausted. The effect control to be performed may be executed. After the hold ream notification effect is executed, the hold ream limit flag is set and the hold storage information is newly confirmed until the variable display based on all the hold storage information targeted for the notification reminder is executed. The execution of the effect control process may be restricted so that the process for executing the hold continuous notification is not executed. In this way, after executing the hold continuous notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold stations, the hold continuous notification effect is executed until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect is exhausted. Since the prohibition restricts the execution of a new hold continuous notification effect, it is possible to clarify which of the hold storage information is the notification target of the hold continuous notification effect.

After executing the hold continuous notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of hold stations, the execution of the hold sequence notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold sequence notification effect is exhausted. As an example of doing so, the following effects may be executed.

For example, after executing the hold ream notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of hold reams, the number of hold reams is displayed so as to be identifiable by the number of stock images such as icon images, and the target of the hold ream notification effect is Each time the jackpot game state is digested, the icon image may be reduced. Further, when the hold continuous notification is performed based on the newly generated hold storage information, it is possible to increase the number of such icon images. By visualizing the number of pending continuous notification targets so that the player can recognize them in this way, it is possible to execute the pending continuous notification effect that is easy for the player to understand. Further, if such an effect is executed, after simply executing the hold continuous notification effect, the execution of the hold continuous notification effect is restricted until all the hold storage information that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect is exhausted. However, the frequency of the hold continuous notification effect being recognized by the player increases, and it is possible to perform an interesting effect.

[Example of modification of execution timing of hold continuous notification effect]
Next, an example of executing the above-mentioned hold continuous notification effect during the V combo effect (VCOMBO effect) will be described. The V-combo effect is performed during a predetermined period during a predetermined round during the big hit game state when the "design big hit" or "big hit via small hit" is obtained based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14. , It is an effect of notifying the number of prize balls paid out (added value) in a jackpot game state at a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect of notifying the number of prize balls paid out in a plurality of times in stages.

[Example of specific effect when displaying fluctuations after a big hit]
Next, during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot caused by the variation display of the first special symbol, the number of reserved storage information and the pre-reading determination of the reserved storage information are determined. Based on the result, a specific effect of performing a jackpot look-ahead effect in the reserved memory information will be described.

FIG. 29 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing the effect image of the specific effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of a specific effect. The specific effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

In FIG. 29, an example of the specific effect is shown according to the passage of time, and an image having little relation to the specific effect is omitted. In FIG. 30, in order to show an effect that matches the effect content of the specific effect of FIG. 29 and to show the overall control image of the specific effect in an easy-to-understand manner, one variation display after the end of the 4R symbol time reduction jackpot is displayed. An example is shown which is executed by the variable display by the second special symbol. Further, in FIG. 30, four second reserved storage information are accumulated during the winning promotion effect, and the second reserved storage is a big hit via a symbol jackpot or a small hit in the second reserved storage information up to the third. The information was not included (for example, when the fourth second reserved storage information includes a jackpot via a symbol jackpot or a small hit, and when the fourth second reserved storage information contains a symbol jackpot. Or, depending on whether the big hit via the small hit is not included), an example is shown in which all four variable displays accumulated during the winning promotion effect are sequentially executed after the end of the variable display. There is.

29 (A) to 29 (O) and FIG. 30 show an example of a specific effect. After the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot is completed, the variable winning ball device 15 is set to the high base state by executing the electric chew support control until the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner once. Winning a prize in (Denchu) will be facilitated. Therefore, the second reserved storage information can be easily stored by winning the variable winning ball device 15. Further, regarding the second reserved storage information, since the winning probability of the small hit that can be a big hit via the small hit is as high as about 1/7, the small hit is included in the maximum of four second reserved storage information. Hold storage information that is a big hit via the route can be included with a relatively high frequency.

As an effect corresponding to such a game control mechanism, a look-ahead effect using the second reserved memory information as a look-ahead target during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time-saving big hit. Specific production as is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29 (A), at the start of the specific effect, the effect display device 9 performs the specific effect start effect of displaying the specific effect start image 9A indicating the start of the specific effect such as “final determination start”. At the same time, the display of the determination effect moving image (not shown), which is a moving image such as a predetermined movie image, is started. The judgment production video is a movie video with a series of stories, such as a battle production in which an ally (player's ally) character and an enemy character fight each other, and ends as a background moving image from the start of the specific production. It is displayed continuously over time. The specific effect start effect is executed over a first predetermined period so that the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is executed.

The left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 are variably displayed in a reduced mode in the upper right corner of the screen. The downward arrow in the figure indicates that the variable display is in progress.

When the determination start effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29B, the effect display device 9 promotes the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15 such as "Save the hold!" The winning promotion effect of displaying the image 9B is executed. The winning promotion effect is also an effect of promoting the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15, and is also an effect of promoting the accumulation of the second reserved storage information. In this embodiment, a prize-winning promotion image such as "Save hold!" Is displayed in the sense of promoting the storage of the second hold storage information, but the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 15 is promoted. In that sense, a winning promotion effect that displays a winning promotion image that specifies a specific winning location, such as "Let the electric chew win a prize!", May be executed.

In the winning promotion effect, for example, a second predetermined period required from when the number of the second reserved storage information is "0" to the maximum "4" is set as the longest period. Even during the second predetermined period, when the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the maximum "4", the process ends at that time in order to suppress the subsequent useless launch of the game ball.

After the execution of the winning promotion effect is started, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect according to the number of second reserved storage information. Specifically, when the number of the second reserved storage information is "0", as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 corresponding to the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation display) are displayed. As the image of, the image of the effect symbol (hereinafter referred to as the reach symbol) in which the reach mode (7 ↓ 7) is formed by the symbol of “7” is displayed in the center of the screen. As shown in FIGS. 29 (C) to 29 (G), the winning promotion image 9B continues to be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a reduced manner until the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit (4). To. The winning promotion image 9B is deleted immediately after the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit (4) as shown in FIG. 29 (G).

When the first second hold storage information is generated in the state where the second hold storage information is "0", the hold first change effect for changing the effect mode is executed as shown in FIG. 29 (D). To. In the hold 1st change effect, one reach symbol is added in response to the increase in the second hold storage number, and the reach symbols are displayed in a reduced mode in which two are lined up from the upper center of the screen to the bottom. The production image is changed to the production. In FIG. 29 (D), the top reach symbol shows the currently changing effect symbols 91, 92, 93, and the second reach symbol shows the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the first reserved effect symbol. .. The image of the effect symbol on which the reach symbol is formed is called a reach line. In this way, when the first second reserved storage information is generated, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the effect control for setting the number of reach lines to two (two lines) is executed. An effect of increasing and displaying the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of such reach symbols is called a reach line increase effect.

As shown in FIG. 29 (E), when the second second reserved storage information is generated and the second reserved storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is preempted. The second pending change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying the pre-reading effect symbol 94 displayed in the above and increasing the number of reach lines (3 lines in total). As shown in FIG. 29 (F), when the third second reserved storage information is generated and the second reserved storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is preempted. The third pending change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying the pre-reading effect symbol 94 displayed in the above and increasing the number of reach lines (4 lines in total). As shown in FIG. 29 (G), when the fourth second reserved storage information is generated and the second reserved storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is preempted. The fourth pending change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying the pre-reading effect symbol 94 displayed in the above and increasing the number of reach lines (5 lines in total).

In this way, in the specific effect, in response to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information, the change effect of changing the effect mode to increase the number of reach lines by displaying the look-ahead effect symbol 94 composed of the reach symbols in an increased manner is performed. It is done. It is the following effect intention to increase and display the number of reach lines of the look-ahead effect symbol 94 consisting of the reach symbol of "7" as the image displayed in response to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information in the specific effect. There is.

First, in the variation display other than the variation display in which the specific effect is executed, the reach symbol when the effect symbol is set to the reach display mode by the effect control microcomputer 100 is, for example, "7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numbers". It is selected and decided so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different due to the relationship such as "design". Therefore, the player's expectation for a big hit is highest when the reach symbol is "7" among the reach symbols selected from the plurality of types. Therefore, in the specific effect, each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display is a reach symbol of "7" from the viewpoint of high expectation that it will be a big hit depending on the type of reach symbol. Is displayed by. As a result, in the specific effect, each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display is displayed with the reach symbol of "7" that the player feels advantageous, so that the player can hit the jackpot. Expectations can be raised. Further, in the specific effect, the effect of increasing the number of reach lines by the reach symbol of "7" can further increase the player's expectation for a big hit.

As the reach symbol used for the effect of increasing the number of reach lines in the specific effect, a symbol other than "7" may be used. For example, a symbol showing the character "RUSH" (a character that suggests an advantageous state for the player, such as a rush of big hits, a rush of small hits, and a rush of a time saving state (electric support state)) (in a normal variable display). It is also possible to use a character dedicated to a specific effect that is not used).

Moreover, you may use the reach symbol of "3". The reason is as follows. In pachinko gaming machines, in general, the reach symbol of "7" has a high degree of expectation for a big hit, a high degree of expectation for the maximum number of rounds when a big hit occurs, and after the end of the big hit game state. It is used as a symbol that the player expects to have a high degree of expectation that the player will be in an advantageous state (time saving state, electric support state, probabilistic state in a gaming machine that is in a probabilistic state, etc.). For example, the reach symbol when the effect symbol is set to the reach display mode is the degree of expectation that is the maximum number of rounds when a big hit occurs because of the relationship such as "7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numerical symbols". May be set to be selected and determined differently. As a result, it is expected that a general player has a feeling of expectation that the number of rounds when a big hit occurs will be the maximum round of big hits when the reach symbol of "7" is displayed.

Depending on the distribution of the number of rounds when it becomes a big hit, the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the first special symbol and the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the second special symbol are the big hits of the maximum number of rounds. In some cases, the selection rate of the type is set to be less than the selection rate of the jackpot type other than the maximum number of rounds. In such a case, when the jackpot is based on the reach symbol of "7", which also has the meaning of suggesting the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds in the specific production, the jackpot type of the number of rounds other than the maximum number of rounds is selected. In some cases. When a jackpot type other than the maximum number of rounds is selected even though the jackpot is based on the reach symbol of "7", the player feels that the jackpot based on the reach symbol of "7" is the maximum number of rounds. If you have, the player's sense may not be consistent with the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In order to prevent such inconsistency in feeling, the above-mentioned symbol of "3", which has a higher expectation of a maximum number of rounds than "7" and a higher expectation of a big hit than other numerical symbols, is specified. It may be used as a reach symbol forming a reach line in the above.

In addition, as the reach line increase effect by the reach symbol in the specific effect, the reach selected from the symbol of "7", the symbol of "3", and the other symbols at a predetermined ratio according to the degree of expectation to be a big hit. A reach line may be formed by a symbol. In that case, the degree of expectation for the big hit and the degree of expectation for the maximum number of rounds of the big hit as described above may be different depending on the type of the reach symbol displayed as the reach line. By doing so, the variation of the reach pattern of the reach line is enriched, and the player can recognize the degree of expectation that each second reserved storage information or the like will be a big hit, so that the fun of the production is improved.

In addition, such a specific effect is the first special effect as the first variation display after the end of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot game state, in addition to the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot game state. It may be executed when the variable display of the symbol is executed. Further, such a specific effect may be executed in a variable display of a predetermined timing after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot other than the symbol 4R time saving jackpot.

When the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit value or the second predetermined period elapses from the start of the winning promotion effect, the winning promotion effect ends and is shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J). A suggestion effect suggesting whether or not such a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time saving big hit) is executed is executed. If the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit before the second predetermined period elapses during the execution period of the prize-winning promotion effect, it takes time without proceeding until the execution start timing of the suggestion effect is reached. It becomes a waiting period to wait for the progress of. Since the start timing of the suggestion effect is set to a fixed timing in advance, such a waiting period is provided for the winning promotion effect. The waiting period is not a period for executing a dedicated effect or the like, but a period for waiting for the progress of the effect (note that during the waiting period, a predetermined effect such as an effect indicating that the second reserved storage information is full). You may display the production image of). In the suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J), the display results are derived and displayed in order from the top in the reach lines arranged in the vertical direction corresponding to the variable display and the second reserved storage information. To go. Specifically, the reach is in the order of this change (referred to as the change) → the first hold storage information → the second hold storage information → the third hold storage information → the fourth hold storage information. The combination of stop symbols is shown for each line. Such a combination of stop symbols is also called a suggestion effect symbol.

When the fluctuation display and the stored second hold storage information do not become a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit), FIGS. 29 (H) and 29 (I) As shown in, the corresponding reach symbol is displayed as a suggestion effect symbol stopped at the combination of the outlier symbols (the combination in which the “7” symbols are not aligned). In FIG. 29 (J), a display example is shown when the second second reserved storage information becomes a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit).

When each of the fluctuation display and the stored second reserved storage information becomes a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R time-saving big hit), for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (J). , The corresponding reach symbol stops at the combination of jackpot symbols (combination with all the symbols of "7"), and is enlarged and emphasized. The symbol combination in which the three symbols are aligned is reminiscent of an advantageous state (big hit, etc.) for the player. As a result, during the fluctuation display, each of the fluctuation display and the stored second reserved storage information becomes a small hit (big hit via the small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time saving big hit) that is advantageous for the player. Is suggested.

In this way, in the suggestion effect, the player's expectation for the big hit can be raised by displaying the symbol combination image reminiscent of the advantageous state for the player before it becomes a realistic big hit. By displaying a symbol combination image that suggests a big hit from the timing before the variation display result of the variation display is derived and displayed, the player is relieved at an early timing and the player's interest is excited from the early timing. be able to. The suggestion effect period for performing such a suggestion effect is set to be executed in a common constant effect period regardless of the number of reach lines.

In the suggestion effect, if there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (symbol 15R time-saving big hits) among the variable display and the stored second reserved storage information, it corresponds. Each of the plurality of reach symbols stops at the combination of jackpot symbols (combination in which the symbols of "7" are aligned), and is enlarged and highlighted.

If there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (design 15R time-saving big hits) among the fluctuation display and the stored second reserved storage information, small hits (small hits). The information that the timing of the big hit (via big hit) or big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) is earlier (for example, the second second reserved storage information and the third second reserved storage information are small hits or big hits). In some cases, only the ones corresponding to the second second reserved storage information) are targeted, and the corresponding reach symbols are stopped at the combination of jackpot symbols (combination with all the symbols of "7") and enlarged. It may be emphasized.

The symbol stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols having the symbols of "7" as shown in FIG. 29 (J) is the jackpot or the jackpot (symbol) via the small hit based on the corresponding variable display or the reserved storage information. It is an image that suggests that a 15R time saving jackpot will occur in advance, and then until the corresponding fluctuation display (variation display based on the fluctuation display or reserved storage information) is executed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is continuously displayed as an image suggesting (notifying) that the player is in an advantageous state.

After the suggestion effect is executed, the following display is performed at the end of the variation display. In the suggestion effect, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the second reserved storage information includes a holding storage information that becomes a big hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) via a small hit. When it is included, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols is displayed as a suggestion effect symbol in the center of the screen, and the variable display is displayed. The variation display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 corresponding to the above are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.

Further, in the suggestion effect, the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) in the second hold storage information. When the stored information is not included, the variation display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 corresponding to the variation display stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols are displayed in the center of the screen.

Further, in the suggestion effect, the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the second reserved storage information is a holding storage information that is a big hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) via a small hit. When included, the variation display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variation display stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols and the look-ahead effect symbol corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols. The fluctuation display result of 94 is displayed in the center of the screen.

In the variable display based on the second reserved storage information after the suggestion effect is completed, an effect of displaying (notifying) that the main symbol is a big hit and displaying (notifying) that the small symbol is out of order is executed. May be done.

In the suggestion effect, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via a small hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit), and the second reserved storage information includes a holding storage information that becomes a big hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) via a small hit. When it is not included, at the end of a series of suggestion effects, the combination of the out-of-reach symbols, which is the combination of the out-of-reach symbols, is displayed in the center of the screen.

When there are a plurality of suggestion effect symbols 94 stopped by the combination of jackpot symbols in the suggestion effect, a plurality of look-ahead effect symbols 94 are displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols at the end of the variation display. If there are a plurality of look-ahead effect symbols 94 stopped by the combination of jackpot symbols in the suggestion effect, one look-ahead effect symbol 94 may be displayed as a representative image in a combination of jackpot symbols at the end of the variation display. ..

After the variable display results in an off-display result, the variable display is sequentially executed for the second reserved storage information that is the target of the specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to 29 (O). FIG. 29 is an example in which it is suggested that the second second reserved storage information is a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit) in the suggestion effect. The pre-reading effect symbol 94 corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols shown in 29 (K) is continuously displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to (O). , The variable display of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to each reserved storage information itself is executed in a reduced mode (small symbol mode) in the lower right corner of the screen.

In the specific effect, when the variable display is executed for the second reserved storage information (in this example, the second reserved storage information) for which the look-ahead effect symbol 94 is the target of the combination of the jackpot symbols, FIG. 29 (O) shows. As described above, the display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 that are variablely displayed in the lower right corner of the screen become the jackpot display results, and the look-ahead effect symbols 94 that are continuously displayed in the center of the screen are enlarged and emphasized. .. As a result, in the specific effect, an effect of notifying that the small hit (big hit via the small hit) or the big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) suggested in the suggestion effect is performed is performed. The judgment effect movie, which is continuously displayed as a series of movie images from the start of the specific effect, ends the display when the jackpot display is executed and the specific effect ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (O). To.

By executing such a specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), a change effect is executed according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect is executed. By changing the production mode, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by making the production interesting.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the change effect and the hold in the specific effect are caused by executing the change effect in connection with the increase in the number of reserved storage information due to the winning promotion effect. The relationship with the number of stored information can be clearly recognized by the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect from ending without executing the change effect in the specific effect.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, a change is performed by executing a reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines in accordance with an increase in the number of second reserved storage information. It is possible to make the relationship between the effect and the number of second reserved storage information visually easy to understand.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, the number of reach lines of the same "7" symbol is increased according to the increase in the number of reserved storage information, so that the type of reach mode can be changed. It is possible to facilitate the development and design of the production control, for example, it is not necessary to consider the production pattern regarding the expectation level that is advantageous to the player, such that the expectation level that is advantageous to the player is different accordingly. In addition, as the number of reach symbols increases, players will pay attention to specific effects with a certain sense of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 30, the development design of the effect control can be facilitated by allowing the suggestion effect period to be executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of reach lines.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (G) and 29 (H), the winning promotion effect is terminated when the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit (4), thereby suppressing unnecessary promotion effects. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the production.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O), by executing a specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of reserved storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a judgment effect movie, the game is played by the effect. Can improve the interest of.

In the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the effect of stopping the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect symbol 94 in the suggestion effect is not stopped in a predetermined order. You may produce the effect of stopping at the same time at one time.

Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect symbol 94 are stopped in the suggestion effect, an operation means image such as a button image is displayed. It is displayed to display an operation promotion such as a "press" image, and the suggestion effect symbol 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order according to the movement of the player (operation of the push button 120, etc.), or once. The effect of stopping at the same time may be used.

Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect symbol 94 are stopped in the suggestion effect, an operation means image such as a button image is displayed. It may or may not be displayed, and at a rate set so that the player is more likely to be in a favorable state (for example, a small hit or a big hit) than when the displayed one is not displayed. After displaying the operation means image and displaying the operation promotion such as the "press" image, the suggestion effect symbol 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order according to the movement of the player (operation of the push button 120, etc.). Alternatively, it may be produced to stop at the same time at one time.

Further, in the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, after the start of the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), the reserved storage information as shown in FIGS. 29 (C) to 29 (G) is supported one by one. When the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the maximum "4" or the second predetermined period elapses without executing the changed effect, the reach corresponding to the second reserved storage information during that period is reached. It is also possible to execute an effect of forming a display that collectively forms the reach lines by the symbols (display that increases the number of reach lines at one time).

Further, in the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second reserved storage information is obtained for the effect suggesting that the suggested effect is a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit). An example of suggesting in the order corresponding to the order of occurrence is shown. However, not limited to this, the second hold storage information is generated at the start of the suggestion effect in the order of executing the effect suggesting that the effect is a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R time-saving big hit). The selection may be randomly selected regardless of the order in which the selections were made.

Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the small hit (big hit via the small hit) or the big hit (design) is performed by simply performing the effect of deriving and displaying the variation display result of each reach line in the suggestion effect. It was suggested that it would be a 15R time saving jackpot), but not only such a variable display result, but also a predetermined production such as a battle production (a production in which a ally character and an enemy character fight) and a reach line display result. It may be executed in combination with the derivation effect. For example, before the display result of each reach line is derived and displayed, the image of the battle effect is displayed, and when the ally character wins, it becomes a combination of jackpot symbols, and when the ally character loses, it becomes a combination of offset symbols. A combination of productions may be used. Such a combination of effects may be executed at a turning point, for example, the combination of effects may be executed twice for the first reach line and the last reach line, and the effect is produced only for the last reach line. You may execute the combination of. In addition, the timing for executing the combination of effects may be randomly selected. Further, the timing of executing the combination of effects may be different depending on whether the degree of expectation for a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time-saving big hit) is high and the degree of expectation is low. There are times when such a combination of effects is not executed and times when it is executed, and when it becomes a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (design 15R time saving big hit), even if it is executed with a 100% probability. Well, it may not be executed when it is not a small hit or a big hit. Further, as the timing at which the effect of such a combination is executed approaches the final reach line, the expectation may be higher if it is a small hit or a big hit. If it is possible to execute the production by such various combinations, the variation of the production is enriched, and the fun of the production can improve the fun of the game.

Further, in the suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J), when the reach symbol is a combination of outlier symbols, the combination of the symbols may be deleted from the screen thereafter.

Next, the first specific effect process for executing the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 in the effect symbol changing process (S802) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first processing of the specific effect. The first specific effect process of FIG. 31 is configured and executed as a part of the process during effect symbol change (S802).

In the first process of the specific effect, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display result of the variation display executed this time is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot (the first variation display). S881).

In the game control microcomputer 560, as a variation pattern to be selected at the time of variation display, a special effect pattern as an effect pattern that is always selected at the time of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot is used. It is provided. In the game control microcomputer 560, in the variation pattern setting process (S301) of FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot. When it is determined by the processing step and the processing step that it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot, the variation pattern of the variation display of that time is described above. A processing step of selecting a special variation pattern and a processing step of transmitting a variation pattern command for designating the selected special variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 are included.

In S881, by confirming whether or not the above-mentioned special variation pattern has been received based on the data in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103, the variation display result of the variation display executed this time can be obtained. It is determined whether or not it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot.

In S881, in the determination of whether or not it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot, if it is determined that there is no symbol, the process is terminated and it is determined that there is. At the time, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start of the variable display (S882). When it is determined in S882 that it is the start of the variable display, the display of the determination start effect is started and the display of the determination effect moving image is started (S883), and the process is ended, as shown in FIG. 29 (A). On the other hand, when it is determined in S882 that it is not the start of the variation display, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the determination start effect by checking the passage of time from the start of the determination start effect (S884). ..

When it is determined in S884 that it is the end of the determination start effect, the display of the determination start effect is terminated (S885). Then, after starting the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), a series of effects for displaying the reach line with the “7” symbol as shown in FIG. 29 (C) are started (S886), and the process is performed. finish. If the number of second reserved storage information is not "0" at the start of the specific effect and there are several, when the first reach line is displayed, the initial value of the second reserved storage information is displayed. Display the reach line of numbers.

When it is determined in S884 that it is not the end of the determination start effect, it is at the time of the start prize to the second start prize opening 14 based on confirming whether or not it is the time of receiving the second start prize designation command. It is determined whether or not there is (S887). When it is determined in S887 that it is the start winning number, the starting winning number counter as a counting means for counting the starting winning number to the second starting winning opening 14 during the specific effect is updated by +1 addition (S888). The start winning number counter is a counting means for counting the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning opening 14 when executing a specific effect. The start winning number counter counts the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning opening 14 with the number of second reserved storage information (for example, “0” or the like) at the start of the specific effect as an initial value. Next, according to the number of starting prizes counted by the starting winning number counter updated in S888, the change effects as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G) are executed (S889), and the process is terminated.

When it is determined in S887 that it is the start winning prize, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the winning promotion notification effect (S890). In S890, the value of the start winning number counter has reached the upper limit value (4) of the second reserved storage information, or the execution period of the predetermined promotion notification effect (the second predetermined period described above) has ended. When at least one of the above is satisfied, it is determined that the winning promotion notification effect is finished. When it was determined by S890 that the winning promotion notification effect had ended, the winning promotion notification effect was terminated (S891) as shown in FIG. 29 (H), and was stored in the look-ahead process (S501) of FIG. The current second hold storage information (holding storage information based on the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14) is acquired (S892). Then, based on the acquired second reserved storage information, the process of starting the suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J) is executed in (S893), and the process is terminated.

Specifically, in S893, for the currently fluctuating effect symbols 91, 92, 93, the symbol jackpot (symbol 15R time saving jackpot) or small hit (via small hit 16 (15) R) based on the received display result command. It is determined whether or not the time saving big hit, via small hit 9 (8) R time saving big hit, via small hit 5 (4) R time saving big hit) is determined, and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the second reserved storage information is acquired. Based on the second hold storage information, each hold storage information is a symbol big hit (symbol 15R time saving big hit) or a small hit (via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit, via small hit 9 (8) R time saving big hit, small hit It is determined whether or not the hit route is 5 (4) R time saving big hit). Then, in S893, among the reach symbols displayed on the effect display device 9, those corresponding to the second reserved storage information which is the symbol big hit or the small hit are the big hit symbols based on such a determination result. The combination (777) is displayed, and for the one corresponding to the second reserved storage information that is out of order, the effect of displaying the out-of-order symbol combination (combination other than 777) is executed in order for each displayed reach symbol. The production pattern to be performed is determined, and the determined production is started.

In the suggestion effect, an effect different from the effect of deriving the display result on the reach line such as a specific chance-up notice may be executed together, and when such another effect is also executed, in S893, The production pattern is selected and determined, and execution is started. For example, when executing a chance-up notice (big hit expectation is blue <green <red <gold) to change the background image color to blue, green, red, gold, etc. according to the expectation of a small hit or a big hit. , Confirm the contents of the second reserved storage information, and set a predetermined chance-up notice data table (a data table in which the selection ratio of the background image is different depending on whether or not there is the second reserved storage information of the small hit or the big hit, etc. ), The background image color may be selected and determined.

When it is determined by S890 that it is not the end of the winning promotion notification effect, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the suggestion effect by checking whether or not it is the end of the variable display currently being executed. (S894). When it is determined in S894 that it is not the end of the suggestion effect, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S894 that the suggestion effect is finished, the suggestion effect is terminated (S895), the specific effect execution flag is set (S896), and the process is terminated.

The specific effect execution flag set in S896 is a flag indicating whether or not the specific effect is being executed, and is provided for the following purposes. First, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), when displaying the display result of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot during execution of the specific effect, It is confirmed by S803 of FIG. 19 whether or not the specific effect execution flag is set, and when it is set, the variation display result at the end of the variation display in the effect mode of the specific effect as shown in FIG. 29 (K). Is displayed. Secondly, in the production period of the specific effect shown in FIG. 29, after the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot is completed, FIGS. 29 (L) to (L). It is used to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the second process of the specific effect shown in FIG. 30 when the variable display based on the second reserved storage information as shown in O) is executed.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second processing of the specific effect. The second specific effect process of FIG. 32 is configured and executed as a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

In the second specific effect process, first, in order to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not the specific effect execution flag is set (S901). If the specific effect executing flag is not set in S901, the process ends. On the other hand, when the fixed effect executing flag is set in S901, the effect data required to execute the variation display in the variation mode at the time of the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to 29 (O) is displayed. Set (S902). Then, the starting prize number counter is subtracted by "-1" (S903). By subtracting the start winning number counter in S903, whether or not the second reserved storage information accumulated during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot is digested by the variation display. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the starting prize number counter has become "0" (S904). The fact that the starting prize number counter has become "0" means that all of the reserved memory information accumulated during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot has been digested. Shown. If the start winning number counter is not "0" in S904, the process ends. On the other hand, when the start winning number counter is "0" in S904, the specific effect execution flag is reset (S905), the display of the determination effect moving image is terminated (S905), and the process is terminated. As a result, the specific effect ends when all of the reserved storage information accumulated during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot is exhausted.

[Explanation of feature units 244F and 245F]
Next, the feature portions 244F and 245F of the present embodiment will be described. Regarding the feature units 244F and 245F, the effect control microcomputer 100 is in a time saving state after the end of various big hit big hit gaming states as shown in FIG. 2 (for example, in the case of the symbol 15R time saving big hit, the second special symbol variation 7 Execution of display control that displays the remaining number of fluctuations that can be executed (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining number of time reductions) during the number of times or the first and second special symbol fluctuations (time saving state, etc. that is continuously executed up to a total of 11 times). Then, various characteristic display control techniques for the display control will be described.

Regarding the feature unit 244F, the number of remaining time reductions for the second variation display (hereinafter, also referred to as the second variable display or the second special symbol variation) executed based on the second hold storage in the time reduction state is displayed. When the first variable display (hereinafter, also referred to as the first variable display or the first special symbol variation) executed based on the first reserved storage is executed, the first display control is executed as the display control to be executed. An example and a second display control example will be described.

As a first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the time saving remaining number of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the time saving remaining number is not displayed. The display control to be performed will be described.

As a second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the time reduction remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the first variable display is executed. A display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions will be described.

For various jackpots as shown in FIG. 2, the game control microcomputer 560 has the first variable display and the total number of second variable displays in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state (for example, 11). The first condition that became (times, etc.) and the second number of times (for example, 7 times, etc.) that the number of times of the second variable display (second special symbol variation) in the time saving state became less than the first number of times became The control for terminating the time saving state is executed based on the fact that one of the conditions is satisfied.

Regarding the feature unit 245F, regarding the display of the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time saving state, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second. When the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the condition is satisfied is exceeded, the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time saving state, and at least until the first condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display of the above is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the total number of times is used as the remaining number of times. The display control to be displayed will be described.

The effect control microcomputer 100 displays on the effect display device 9 the remaining number of variable displays (time reduction remaining number) of the special symbol that can be executed during the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and according to the game situation. , Executes the display control of the remaining number of times.

[First display control example]
FIG. 33-1 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing a first display control example of the number of remaining time reductions. In FIGS. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of the effect mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 15R time saving big hit (see FIG. 2). In FIG. 33-1 during the time saving state, after the variable display of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times as shown in (A) to (H), the jackpot display result is derived and displayed as shown in (I). A control example is shown.

As an example, the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 15R time saving big hit includes the first condition that the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation in the time saving state is 11 times, and the time saving. It ends based on the condition of either one of the second condition that the number of times of the second special symbol change in the state is 7 times is satisfied. Hereinafter, in the time saving state, the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which is the first condition of the time saving end condition, is referred to as "total remaining number of times", and is referred to as the second condition of the time saving end condition. The remaining number of times only for a certain second special symbol change is called the "second special symbol remaining number of times".

As shown in FIG. 33-1 (A), when the jackpot game state ends, the time saving start display image 98 showing the characters “Chance time rush” is displayed, and it is notified that the time saving state is started. As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (A) to (H), a right-handed image 97 instructing (promoting) to hit right (aiming to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14) during the time saving state. Is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), at the start of the time saving state (total remaining number of times 11 times, second special figure remaining number of times 7 times), as an image showing the remaining number of times in the time saving state, "remaining 7 times". The time-saving remaining number image 96 indicating is displayed. The time-saving remaining number image 96 displaying "remaining 7 times" shows the remaining number of times only for the second special symbol variation, which is the second condition of the time-saving end condition.

In the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the number of remaining times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the second special figure is set as the remaining number of time saving. Display the number of times. Then, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number. To do. Further, in the time saving state, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied are the same, the second special figure remaining number is set as the time saving remaining number. Display the number of times.

When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied are the same, the total remaining number of times may be displayed as the time saving remaining number of times.

In this example, when the total number of remaining times until the first condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than the number of remaining times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the second special figure is displayed as the number of remaining time reductions. When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number of times.

To give a specific example, the following time saving remaining number is displayed. For example, "total remaining number 11 times, second special figure remaining number 7 times" in FIG. 33-1 (B), "total remaining number 10 times, second special figure remaining number 7 times" in FIG. 33-1 (E). , Fig. 33-1 (F), (G), "Total remaining number 9 times, 2nd special figure remaining number 6 times", when the total remaining number exceeds the 2nd special figure remaining number As the number of remaining time reductions, the number of remaining times of the second special figure such as "7 times remaining" in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and (E) and "6 times remaining" in FIGS. 33-1 (F) and (G) is used. Time saving Remaining number of times Displayed as image 96. On the other hand, when the total remaining number is less than the second special figure remaining number as shown in FIG. 33-1 (H) "total remaining number 4 times, 2nd special figure remaining number 5 times", the time saving remaining number is set. The total remaining number of times such as “4 times remaining” in FIG. 33-1 (H) is displayed in the time-saving remaining number image 96.

At the start of the time-saving state, the combination of jackpot symbols (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed as the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbol 90. It is displayed as an initial display image, and then the variable display of the time saving state according to the starting prize is executed. In the first variable display (first special symbol variation) in the time-saving state, the symbols of the previous variable display results of the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 as shown in FIG. 33-1 (B) are displayed for 2 to 3 seconds. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (C), the motion of shaking on the spot is performed, and as shown in FIG. 33-1 (D), the variable display result of this time is immediately derived and displayed. On the other hand, in the second variable display (second special symbol variation) in the time saving state, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E), (G), and (H), the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 scroll the time saving pattern. The display (display of the downward arrow in the figure) is performed in a variable operation for 4 to 5 seconds, and the variable display result is derived and displayed.

The average fluctuation time of the first variable display in the time-saving state and the average fluctuation time of the second variable display in the time-saving state are different times (first variable display> second variable display, or first. The variable display <second variable display) may be set, or the same time (same time) may be set. Further, the first variable display in the time saving state may be a scroll display of the time saving pattern as in the second variable display.

In the effect display device 9, variable display (any variable display mode such as scroll display of symbols, switching display of symbols, etc.) is performed corresponding to each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93, and the effect symbols 91, 92. A constantly changing small symbol 90 composed of three small symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, which derives and displays the display results corresponding to each of, and 93, is displayed. The constantly changing small symbol 90 is variably displayed in such a manner that the symbol always fluctuates during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, regardless of the display mode in which the effect symbol is displayed. By displaying such a constantly changing small symbol 90, for example, even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the effect symbol displays 91, 92, and 93 are fluctuating as shown in FIG. 33-1 (C). , The display state of the constantly changing small symbol 90 clearly indicates that the variable display is in progress, and the variable display result is clearly shown. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (I), when the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 becomes the big hit display result, the display result of the constantly changing small symbol 90 also becomes the big hit display result, and it is called "big hit!". Such a jackpot notification image 99 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the time saving state. Occasionally, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is temporarily erased during the variable display period (variable time) of the first variable display (the portion indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure). After that, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E), the time saving remaining number image 96 is redisplayed without updating the time saving remaining number display at the start of execution of the next second variable display (second special symbol variation). By doing so, display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), if the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the remaining number is displayed. Since it is possible to control the display so that the number of times is not displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) to 33-1 (E), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By erasing the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the erased remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to control the display so that the remaining number of times is not displayed. , Since the effect suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated by erasing and redisplaying the display of the remaining number of times, the remaining number of times of the variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further uncomfortable for the player. Can be displayed without giving.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining number of times The number of remaining times of the second special figure is displayed as. Then, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

FIG. 33-2 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to execute the effect display of the time saving remaining number of times shown in FIG. 33-1. FIG. 33-2 (A) shows a process (time saving remaining number display processing A) for controlling the display of the time saving remaining number at the start of fluctuation, and FIG. 33-2 (B) shows the time saving remaining number at the time of stopping the fluctuation. The process of controlling the display (the process of stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol) is shown.

The time saving remaining number display process A of FIG. 33-2 (A) is a process performed as a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801) of FIG.

First, at the time of this variation display, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the variation display (first variable display) of the first special symbol in the state where the remaining number of times of the second special symbol is displayed in the time saving state ( S911). In S911, it is determined whether or not the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state by confirming whether or not the second special figure remaining number display flag set by S928 described later is set. .. Then, in S911, based on confirming whether or not the first special symbol variation designation command of FIG. 7 has been received, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the variation display of the first special symbol.

In S911, if it is not the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the remaining number of times of the second special symbol is displayed in the time saving state, the process ends. On the other hand, in S911, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the state where the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed during the current variation display. , Fig. 33-1 (C), (D), which is a setting for executing an effect of temporarily erasing (the part indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure) during the variable display period of the first variable display. The remaining number display erasure setting is set (S912), and the time saving remaining number is not redisplayed by the time when the execution of the second variable display (second special symbol variation) is started after the processing is completed. In addition, in the time saving remaining number display erasure setting of S912, in addition to the effect of temporarily erasing the time saving remaining number image 96 for the time saving remaining number image 96, the second variable display is performed again as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E). It may be a setting for executing the effect to be displayed.

When the time saving remaining number display erasure setting is made in this way, in the effect symbol changing process (S802) and the effect symbol variation stopping process (S803) of FIG. 19, the second special figure remaining number is set as the time saving remaining number image 96. When the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while the image is being displayed, the effect of erasing the time-saving remaining number of times image 96 is as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D). Will be executed. On the other hand, in S911, when it is determined that it is not the start of the variation display of the first special symbol in the state where the remaining number of times of the second special symbol is displayed in the time saving state, S912 is not executed, so that the second special symbol is not executed in the time saving state. 2 When the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed when the remaining number of special symbols is displayed, and when the variation display of the first separate symbol is displayed when the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, or When the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the time-saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E) to (H).

The effect symbol fluctuation stop process of FIG. 33-2 (B) is a process configured to enable display control of the time saving remaining number shown in FIG. 33-1 in the effect symbol variation stop process of S803 of FIG. is there.

In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (S921). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the stop symbol display flag is not set, the stop symbols (missing symbols, big hit symbols, or small hit symbols) that are predetermined for the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbols 90 are set. Is controlled to stop and display (S922).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol that becomes a jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a big hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit symbol, it is confirmed whether or not it is a small hit symbol (that is, whether or not the small hit display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a small hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when it is not a symbol that is a small hit, that is, when it is a missed symbol, it is the remaining number of totals of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which are the first conditions of the time saving end condition. Is confirmed (S925).

The "total remaining number of times" is a first special symbol that differs depending on the type of jackpot as shown in FIG. 2 when a counting area for counting the total remaining number of times is provided in the RAM 103 and the jackpot gaming state ends in the counting area. The first symbol variation specification command and the second are transmitted when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol variation is set as the initial value of the "total remaining number" and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives any of the second symbol variation designation commands transmitted when the special symbol variation display is executed, the operation of subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such a calculation of the "total remaining number of times" is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, for example, as in the command analysis process (S704) of FIG. In S925, the "total remaining number of times" is confirmed by confirming the data of the "total remaining number of times" calculated in this way.

Next, the "second special symbol remaining number", which is the remaining number of times only for the second special symbol change, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition, is confirmed (S926). The "second special figure remaining number of times" is a type of big hit as shown in FIG. 2 when a counting area for counting the remaining number of times of the second special figure is provided in the RAM 103 and the big hit game state ends in the counting area. When the maximum value of the number of times of only the second special symbol change, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition, is set as the initial value of the "second special symbol remaining number", and the change display of the second special symbol is executed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the second symbol variation designation command transmitted to, the operation of subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such a calculation of the "second special figure remaining number of times" is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, such as the command analysis process (S704) of FIG. In S926, the "second special figure remaining number" is confirmed by confirming the data of the "second special figure remaining number" calculated in this way.

Next, as the remaining number of times in the time saving state, it is confirmed whether or not the "total remaining number of times" confirmed in S925 is equal to or greater than the "second special figure remaining number of times" confirmed in S926 (S927). When the "total remaining number of times" is equal to or greater than the "second special figure remaining number" in S927, the second special figure remaining number confirmed in S926 is displayed on the time-saving remaining number image 96 (S928), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and 33-1 (F), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is displayed with the second special figure remaining number, which is the remaining number of the second special symbol variation. Further, in S928, a second special figure remaining number display flag indicating that the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state is set. On the other hand, when the "total remaining number" is less than the "second special figure remaining number" in S927, the total remaining number confirmed in S925 is displayed on the time-saving remaining number image 96 (S929), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (H), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as the "total remaining number" which is the remaining number of the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. Further, in S929, a total remaining number display flag indicating that the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state is set. In S930, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S930), and the process ends.

Further, the stop symbol display flag is set in S931 depending on whether the stop symbol display flag is set in S921, the big hit is determined in S923, or the small hit is determined in S924. Whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (any of the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag to the jackpot start 5 designation command reception flag) is set. Confirm (S932).

If it is determined in S932 that the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S934). Then, the preparation setting for executing the jackpot display for producing the fanfare effect for the jackpot is set (S934). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S935), and the process ends. Preparation settings for executing the jackpot display include, for example, selection of a process table for executing the jackpot display such as a fanfare effect corresponding to the jackpot type, start of the process timer, and an effect display device 9 according to the contents of the process data. Etc., the execution of the control of the effect device such as, etc. is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S932 that the big hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the small hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received (the first small hit start designation command reception flag) -It is confirmed whether or not (one of the third small hit start designation command reception flags) is set (S936).

If it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S937). Then, the preparation setting for executing the small hit display for producing the fanfare effect for the small hit is made (S938). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (S808) (S939), and the process ends. Preparation settings for executing the small hit display include, for example, selection of a process table for executing small hit display such as a fanfare effect for small hits, start of a process timer, and an effect display device according to the contents of process data. The execution of the control of the effect device such as 9 is started.

By executing the processes S924 to S929 among such effect symbol fluctuation stop processes, the display control of the time saving remaining number as shown in FIG. 33-1 is executed in the effect symbol variation stop process. Can be done.

[Second display control example]
FIG. 33-3 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing a second display control example of the number of remaining time reductions. In FIG. 33-3, similarly to FIGS. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of the effect mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 15R time saving big hit (see FIG. 2). Has been done. In FIG. 33-2, after the variation display of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times as shown in (A) to (H) during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 33-1. A control example in which the jackpot display result is derived and displayed is shown in.

FIG. 33-3 differs from FIG. 33-1 in that the following display control is executed. As shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), the time-saving remaining number image 96 is usually displayed in red (the characters "(red)" in the figure represent the color of the time-saving remaining number image 96). The color (normal color). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the time saving state, the first variable display (first special symbol variation). When is executed, the color of the time-saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the standard red color to blue during the variable display period of the first variable display as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D). The display control for changing to a special color and not updating the display of the time saving remaining number displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D), the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 in the time saving state. In this case, it is possible to control the display without updating the display of the remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By changing the color of the time-saving remaining number image 96, it is possible to produce an effect suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time-saving state can be further increased by the player. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining number of times The number of remaining times of the second special figure is displayed as. Then, in the time saving state, when at least the total remaining number until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

FIG. 33-4 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to execute the effect display of the time saving remaining number of times shown in FIG. 33-3. FIG. 33-4 (A) shows a process for controlling the time reduction number display at the start of the fluctuation (time reduction remaining number display process B), and FIG. 33-4 (B) shows the time reduction display at the time when the fluctuation stops. The process of controlling (the process of stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol) is shown.

The time-saving remaining number display process B of FIG. 33-4 (A) is a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801) of FIG. 19, similarly to the time-saving remaining number display process A of FIG. 33-2 (A). It is a process performed as a process.

The process shown in FIG. 33-4 is different from the process shown in FIG. 33-2 in FIG. 33-4 (A), and FIG. 33-4 (B) is different from FIG. 33-2 (B). It is the same process. The time saving remaining number display process B in FIG. 33-4 (A) is different from the time saving remaining number display process A in FIG. 33-2 (A) in S911, and the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state. When it is the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state of being in the state, the variable display of the first variable display is shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D) during the current variable display. During the period, the time saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the standard color of red to the special color of blue, and the setting for executing the effect of not updating the display of the time saving remaining number displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96. A certain time saving remaining number display update limit setting is set (S912A), and the process is terminated.

When the time saving remaining number display update limit setting is set in this way, in the effect symbol changing process (S802) and the effect symbol variation stopping process (S803) of FIG. 19, the time saving remaining number image 96 is the second special figure remaining number. When the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as a red standard. Along with changing the color to a special blue color, an effect of not updating the display of the time-saving remaining number displayed in the time-saving remaining number image 96 is executed.

In FIG. 33-4 (B), similarly to FIG. 33-2 (B), the processing of S924 to S929 and the like is executed, so that the time reduction as shown in FIG. 33-3 in the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. Display control of the remaining number of times can be executed.

In the first display control example of FIG. 33-1 and the second display control example of FIG. 33-3, the jackpot that triggered the start of the time saving state at the start of the production of the time saving state (at the time of entering the chance time). The state in which the combination of symbols (“333” in this example) is stopped and displayed in the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbol 90 is continuously displayed as the initial display image at the start of the effect in the time saving state. After that, when the first variable display is executed, an example is shown in which the symbol of the previous variable display result sways on the spot to derive and display the current display result. However, not limited to this, at the start of the production in the time-saving state (at the time of entering the chance time), it is not always the combination of the jackpot symbols that triggered the start of the time-saving state, but the out-of-order symbol such as "123". After displaying the combination of (so-called loose stitches, etc.), the variable display in the time saving state may be executed.

In general, if the production symbol is swaying on the spot in the state of the jackpot symbol combination, the player misunderstands that the variable display result of this time is displayed as the display result of the jackpot symbol combination. In some cases. Therefore, in order to prevent such a misunderstanding, it is sufficient to display the combination of the out-of-order symbols at the start of the effect in the time-saving state, and then execute the variable display in the time-saving state. In this way, even if the first variable display is executed for the first time in the time-saving state and the display result becomes an out-of-order display result, the effect of changing from the out-of-order display result to another out-of-order display result is performed. Therefore, when the first variable display is executed as the first variable display at the start of the production in the time-saving state, the combination of the jackpot symbols of, for example, "333", which is swaying on the spot, suddenly becomes " It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when changing to the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "334".

In addition, at the start of the production in the time-saving state (when the chance time is entered), the combination of the jackpot symbols (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time-saving state is the production symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constant fluctuation is small. The state in which the symbol 90 is stopped and displayed is continuously displayed as the initial display image at the start of the effect in the time-saving state, and then the combination of the jackpot symbols shakes on the spot, resulting in an off-display result. Even when the variable display is executed, the combination of the jackpot symbols may be maintained and displayed as the variable display result this time. In that case, since the effect symbol is only a symbol for effect, for example, other effect display devices 9 such as the fourth symbol capable of indicating whether or not the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Due to the specific symbol displayed in the area, in the execution of the first variable display, the effect symbol that is shaking is being displayed in a variable manner, and the effect symbol that is stopped is off the display result and the jackpot display result. It suffices if it is possible to indicate which of the above.

[Example of lock display control for updating the remaining number of time reductions]
Next, as in the second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the remaining number is displayed. In the case of display control that does not update the number of times display, as an example of superimposing a predetermined image suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times in the time saving state is not updated on the time saving remaining number image 96, the time saving remaining number update lock display control is used. explain.

FIG. 33-5 is an enlarged view of a display area in the vicinity of the time-saving remaining number image 96 showing an example of time-saving remaining number update lock display control. For example, in the second display control example as shown in FIG. 33-3, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D). In addition, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the display of the remaining number of times of the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated. As shown in FIG. 33-5, in the time saving remaining number update lock display control example, when the display of the remaining number of the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated in this way, the display of the remaining number of time saving state is not updated. As a predetermined image to be suggested, a lock image 96A having transparency and capable of suggesting that the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated by surrounding the periphery of the time saving remaining number image 96 is superimposed on the time saving remaining number image 96. Display control to display is performed. A part of the lock image 96A includes character information such as "LOCK" that suggests that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. The character information suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times such as "LOCK" is not updated may not be included in the lock image 96A.

Such superimposed display of the lock image 96A may be executed, for example, by setting the display with the time saving remaining number update limit display setting of S912A of FIG. 33-4 (A).

As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 and the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the time saving remaining number is executed. By performing display control such as the lock image 96A in which a predetermined image suggesting that the remaining number of times is not updated is superimposed and displayed on the image 96, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be further increased. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

The image to be superposed on the time-saving remaining number image 96 may be an image having high transparency or an image having low transparency, and the remaining number display in the time-saving remaining number image 96 may be visually recognized to some extent. Anything that is possible will do. Further, as the image to be superimposed and displayed on the time-saving remaining number image 96, it is possible to visually recognize that the time-saving remaining number image 96 itself is displayed, but the numerical value of the remaining number may not be visible. Further, the image to be superimposed and displayed on the time-saving remaining number image 96 may be either an image that covers the time-saving remaining number image 96 or an image that covers a part of the time-saving remaining number image 96.

[First display control restriction example]
Next, when the first variable display is executed while the above-mentioned first display control, that is, the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, the remaining number is displayed. A first display control limitation example as a control for adding a limitation to a display control for not displaying the number of times will be described.

As described above, when displaying the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time-saving state in the time-saving state, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is set. It has been described that when the number of remaining times of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the total number of times is displayed as the remaining number of times, not the remaining number of times of the second variable display.

Therefore, when the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the first variable It is considered that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of discomfort even if the display is not controlled so as not to display the remaining number of times when the display is executed. Further, it is considered unnecessary to prevent the remaining number of times from being displayed when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display is displayed. Be done. As a result, when the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the remaining number of times in the variable display time-saving state during the time-saving state, at least the total of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, even if the first variable display is executed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D). Time saving Remaining number of times The control for limiting the first display control is executed by controlling the remaining number of times in the image 96 not to be erased.

In such a first display control restriction example, the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the remaining number of times of the second number of times until the second condition is satisfied. When it is less than, even if the first variable display is executed, the remaining number of times is displayed according to the game state by limiting the effect of controlling the display so as not to display the remaining number of times. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Specific notification example]
Next, a specific notification example that can be commonly executed for the display control of the remaining number of variable displays executed during the time saving state described above will be described. As described above, the specific notification is the end condition of the time-saving state based on the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display, and the end condition of the time-saving state based on the number of times of the second variable display. As the number of times of the first variable display increases, the situation becomes more disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation as much as possible, the first variable display is executed in the time saving state. This is a notification executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to specially promote the execution of the second variable display based on the number of times of the first variable display having reached a specific number or more.

FIG. 33-6 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing a specific notification example. In FIG. 33-6, when the specific number of times is set to, for example, 4 times and the first variable display, which is less than the specific number of times, such as 3 times, is executed in the time saving state, FIG. 33-6 (A). ), The specific notification is not executed. On the other hand, when the first variable display is executed a specific number of times, for example, four times in the short state, a part of the right-handed image 97 is directed to the right as shown in FIG. 33-6 (B). The right-handed emphasized image 97A, in which the arrow image is displayed much larger than the right-pointing arrow image of the right-handed image 97 in FIG. 33-6 (A), executes a specific notification that strongly promotes right-handed striking. Further, as the specific notification, a voice different from the voice output when the normal right-handed image 97 is displayed (for example, a loud voice, a voice such as a warning sound, and a voice such as a warning sound, which is disadvantageous to the player unless the right-handed image 97 is displayed. Each of the special voices such as the voice indicating that the state is reached, and the combination, etc.) are output. Further, as a specific notification, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body such as various lamps provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different from the light emitting mode of the normal right-handed image 97 (for example, light emission with a large light volume). , Each of the special light emission modes such as light emission with different emission colors and light emission with different blinking cycles, and combinations, etc.) are executed.

According to such a specific notification example, the first variable display and the second variable display are displayed by the specific notification based on the number of times of the first variable display in the time saving state becomes the specific number or more. In a game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of times or the second variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state by the specific notification.

[Explanation of Feature 068SH / 069SH]
Next, the embodiments relating to the feature portions 068SH and 069SH of the present embodiment will be described. In the embodiment according to the feature portions 068SH and 069SH, the notification regarding the variable winning ball device 15 will be described. In the description of the feature units 068SH and 069SH, the reserved storage information or the reserved storage is also referred to as the reserved information. The number of pending information is also expressed as the number of pending information. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the variable display is also referred to as a variable display.

The feature unit 068SH has a case where the number of hold information stored by the second hold storage buffer is the first number (0 to 3) and a second number (4 pieces) which is larger than the first number. , The feature is that the notification mode is different. Further, when the number of reserved information stored in the second reserved storage buffer reaches the upper limit number (4) of the reserved information that can be stored in the second reserved storage buffer, the feature unit 069SH has an upper limit number. It is characterized in that it executes a arrival notification indicating that it has reached.

First, the technical background of the above-mentioned feature units 068SH and 069SH will be described. In recent years, the specifications and game methods of game machines have diversified, and it may be difficult for a player who has played with the game machine for many years to understand what kind of specifications and game method the game machine is playing. For example, it seems that something is happening on the game machine, but I do not know what is happening, where to shoot the game ball, and whether there is any loss in firing the game ball, etc. People may feel uneasy. In particular, this tendency is remarkable in a special model called a type-two type mixer.

If the player does not understand the game method or the like, the player may suffer a disadvantage or lose an advantageous right. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the notification by the feature units 068SH and 069SH. In addition, the state in which the player feels anxiety not only hinders the improvement of the interest, but also makes it impossible to fully feel the original characteristics of the game machine. According to the present embodiment, since such anxiety can be eliminated, the interest of the player can be improved, and the characteristics of the game machine can be easily understood by the player, so that the player's feeling of excitement can be further enhanced. Can be done. In conventional game machines, right-handed or left-handed hits may be notified, but this alone lacks specificity and cannot prevent wasteful hits of the game ball. Hereinafter, the feature units 068SH and 069SH will be described in detail.

FIG. 34-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 used in the description of the feature portions 068SH and 069SH as viewed from the front. The major difference between the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is that the variable display device is a drum-type pachinko gaming machine, and LEDs indicating the number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is provided, and LEDs for instructing right-handed and left-handed hits are provided.

As shown in FIG. 34-1, the variable display device 68SH009 of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 has a plurality of reels (hereinafter, also referred to as “reels”) having a plurality of types of identification information (designs) attached to the surface thereof. However, a plurality of display areas are formed in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by rotating the plurality of reels. The symbol also includes a blank symbol. In the variable display device, reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R (hereinafter, also referred to as "left reel", "middle reel", "right reel") are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and these reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R Three consecutive regions of the regions arranged in the above are arranged so as to be visible from the perspective window. In the present embodiment, the effective lines 68SHL1 (upper), 68SHL2 (middle), 68SHL3 (lower), 68SHL4 (downward to the right), 68SHL5 (upward to the right) shown by the broken lines in FIG. When 7s are aligned, it becomes a big hit or a small hit.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a first hold storage display 68SH001 and a second hold storage display 68SH002, each of which is composed of four LEDs. Each LED is lit to indicate that a variable display that has not yet been started is pending. In FIG. 34-1, white circles indicate that they are not reserved, and black circles indicate that they are reserved. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is shown that the number of holdings for the first special symbol is 0 and the number of holdings for the second special symbol is 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with ball hitting instruction arrows LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 lights the hitting ball instruction arrow LED68SH005L when instructing the player to hit left, and lights the hitting ball instruction arrow LED68SH005R when instructing the player to hit right. In FIG. 34-1, the mode in which the hitting ball instruction arrows LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R are turned off is indicated by a white arrow, and the mode in which the hitting instruction arrows LEDs are turned on is indicated by a black arrow. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is shown that right-handed strike is instructed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a board lamp 68SH015. The board lamp 68SH015 is a lamp provided on the back surface of the game board 6 and irradiates the game board 6 from the back of the game board 6, and the irradiated light passes through the game board 6. The board lamp 68SH015 also illuminates the area around the variable winning ball device 15. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with an electric chew lamp 68SH016. The electric chew lamp 68SH016 is a lamp provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and is a lamp for making the variable winning ball device 15 stand out.

As described above, the variable winning ball device 15 serves as a variable winning ball device that changes between an open state and a closed state. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 according to the feature units 068SH and 069SH, the variable winning ball device 15 has a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state. It can be changed to. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a mark "M" as a mark. The mark "M" is used for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (voice notification: "Aim at M").

FIG. 34-2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31 in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The difference from the main board (game control board) 31 shown in FIG. 3 is that the liquid crystal display device 9 is out of the configuration, the reel motor 68SH010, the reel sensor 68SH012, the reel LED68SH014, the ball striking arrow LEDs 68SH005L, 68SH005R, and the first hold storage display. The device 68SH001 and the second hold storage display 68SH002 are included as new configurations.

The reel motor 68SH010 is controlled by a motor drive signal (phase signal of the stepping motor) output from the effect control board 80. The reel motor 68SH010 is provided corresponding to each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. The left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel are rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, so that three consecutive areas are displayed in the perspective window while continuously changing for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. By stopping the rotation of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, three continuous regions are derived and displayed as display results in the perspective window 3.

The reel sensor 68SH012 is provided inside the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and detects a reference position for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. The reel LED68SH014 illuminates the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel from the back surface. The reel LED68SH014 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive regions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and each region can be independently irradiated.

FIG. 34-3 is a diagram showing a design arrangement of reels. Red 7, blue 7, promotion notification symbols, and arrival notification symbols are drawn on the reel in a predetermined order so as to be distinguishable from each other as symbols (identification information). Of these, red 7 and blue 7 are sizes that fit within one region, but the promotion notification symbol and the arrival notification symbol are sizes that span three consecutive regions.

FIG. 34-4 (A) is a diagram showing a hit type table in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The main difference from the type table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and the jackpot without time reduction are provided in the symbol jackpot. In the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction, a big hit without a symbol 5R time reduction, a big hit with 11 (10) R time reduction via a small hit, and a big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via a small hit are provided. There is. The number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened is shown in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit. The jackpot determination value described in FIG. 5B is used for determining the jackpot with the symbol 5R time reduction and the jackpot without the symbol 5R time reduction. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction and the jackpot without the symbol 5R time reduction in this embodiment is 1/199. Similarly, the big hit judgment value described with reference to FIG. 5B is used for the small hit judgment. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1 / 7.35.

The jackpot via small hit in the present embodiment includes a jackpot with 11 (10) R time reduction via small hit and a jackpot with 6 (5) R time reduction via small hit, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment includes a symbol 5R jackpot with a time reduction and a symbol 5R jackpot without a time reduction that are directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R). The big hit with no time reduction of the symbol 5R is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R). In the 11 (10) R time saving big hit via the small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 10 times (10R) on condition of the V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 11 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 10 times, and the player can open the big winning opening in the same big hit as the symbol 10R time saving big hit. I feel it is a type. 6 (5) R time saving via small hit For big hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the big winning opening is the same big hit type as the symbol 5R time saving big hit.

The condition for ending the time reduction state after the big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction is the same as the condition described in FIG. That is, as a condition for ending the time saving state after the big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction, the end condition that the number of times the variation of the second special symbol is displayed once and the total number of times of the variation display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Two conditions are set, one is the end condition of 5 times. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one considers that the game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one may generate a big hit via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. There is a certain number of times.

There is a time reduction of symbol 5R The time reduction state after a big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 5 times. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described with reference to FIG. The reason is the same as that described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, and before the jackpot game state, a maximum of four can be stored in the first start winning prize. This is to ensure that even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the pending information of is started, the variable display of one time of the second special symbol, which is easy to be determined as a big hit that is advantageous for the player, can be executed. .. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

No time reduction for symbol 5R After a big hit, it shifts to a special normal state. The special normal state is a state in which only the effect performed by the effect control board 80 is different from the normal state. Therefore, the advantage to the player is the same as the normal state. In addition, the special normal state continues to fluctuate up to 30 times. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R time-saving big hit, via small hit 11 (10) R time-saving big hit, and via small hit 6 (5) R time-saving big hit may be expressed as time-saving big hit.

FIGS. 34-4 (B) and 34-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 34-4 (B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 34-4 (C) is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type of the big hit via the small hit when the small hit is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (B), the numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for the jackpot type determination are "symbol 5R time reduction and jackpot" and "symbol 5R time reduction not". The jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the second special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (C), the numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 for determining the jackpot type are "symbol 5R time reduction and jackpot" and "symbol 5R time reduction not". The jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the case of the present embodiment, "sign 5R big hit with time reduction" and "design 5R big hit without time reduction" are selected at 50% each.

In the big hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 34-4 (C), it is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2 for determining the big hit type, and it is "via small hit 11 (10) R time saving big hit". The big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "6 (5) R time saving big hit via small hit" is set. However, the jackpot types determined in the jackpot type determination table via small hits are the provisional jackpot linked to each of 11 (10) R time reduction and jackpot and 6 (5) R time reduction and jackpot. It is a type, and it is invalid if a V prize does not occur in the small hit game state. In the case of the present embodiment, "11 (10) R time saving big hit via small hit" and "6 (5) R time saving big hit via small hit" are selected at 50% respectively.

FIG. 34-5 is a diagram showing a transition of the gaming state. FIG. 34-5 shows the normal state, the special normal state, the big hit (design), the big hit (V winning), and the chance time as the game state. First, in the normal state, if a "big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction" or a "big hit without a symbol 5R time reduction" is won, the state shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In the big hit (design) state, when the "big hit with symbol 5R time reduction" is completed, the chance time A shifts to. On the other hand, in the big hit (design) state, when the "design 5R time reduction no big hit" is completed, the state shifts to the special normal state described above.

If you win the "Big hit with symbol 5R time reduction" or "Big hit without symbol 5R time reduction" in the special normal state, the state shifts to the big hit (design) state. In the special normal state, when the fluctuation display of 30 times is completed, the state shifts to the normal state.

Chance time A is the above-mentioned condition, that is, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one, and the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of "sign 5R time reduction big hit". It is a state in which the total number of times is continued until one of the two conditions of the end condition of 5 times is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time A, for the second special symbol, one time reduction and four fluctuations of the holding information of the second special symbol held during the time reduction are combined, and the maximum number of times is five. Fluctuations are made.

In the chance time A, when the "sign 5R big hit with time reduction" or "symbol 5R big hit without time reduction" is won by the variable display based on the hold information of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the big hit (symbol) state again. At chance time A, a small hit is won, and when a V prize occurs, the state shifts to a big hit (via small hit). On the other hand, in the chance time A, if the small hit is not won, or if the small hit is won but the V prize is not generated, the state shifts to the special normal state.

In the big hit (via small hit) state, in the big hit (design) state, when "via small hit 11 (10) R time reduction big hit" or "small hit via 6 (5) R time reduction big hit" ends, chance time Move to B.

Chance time B is a variation display of the second special symbol, which is the above-mentioned condition after the end of "via small hit 11 (10) R time saving big hit" or "via small hit 6 (5) R time saving big hit". It is in a state of continuing until one of two conditions, that is, the end condition that the number of times is 7 times and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time B, for the second special symbol, the time reduction of 7 times and the 4 fluctuations of the hold information of the 2nd special symbol held during the time reduction are combined, and the maximum number of times is 11 times. Fluctuations are made.

In the chance time B, when the "sign 5R big hit with time reduction" or "sign 5R big hit without time reduction" is won by the hold information of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In chance time B, if a small hit is won and a V prize occurs, the state shifts to the big hit (via small hit) state again. On the other hand, in the chance time B, if the small hit is not won, or if the small hit is won but the V prize is not generated, the state shifts to the special normal state.

As shown in FIG. 34-5, in the present embodiment, after the end of the advantageous state, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 5 times in the case of chance time A and up to 11 times in the case of chance time B) of the upper limit number or more. If the advantageous state is controlled again by the time the advantageous state is reached, the special state (chance time B) can be controlled after the advantageous state ends. According to such a configuration, the player is controlled to a special state each time the advantageous state is reached, so that the player's feeling of excitement can be enhanced.

34-6 and 34-7 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 in the present embodiment. In FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7, as in FIGS. 7 and 8, the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified content of the command is shown.

In FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7, the names and contents of 8C02 to 8C05, A001 to A004, A301 to A304, and C401, C402, C501, and C502 are shown in FIG. 7 according to the number of jackpot rounds in the present embodiment. And changed from FIG. Further, in FIG. 34-7, a special normal state is provided in the present embodiment, and new commands D101 to D104 are provided in order to specify opening or closing of the operating port.

FIG. 34-8 shows an example of the variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode corresponds to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and the case where the variable display mode is "reach", and the variable display is also performed. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display result is "missing" and the decorative symbol is displayed. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern.

The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α or super reach X is executed.

FIG. 34-8 (A) shows a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. FIG. 34-8 (B) shows a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. Of the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns, P1A1-2 after the big hit with time reduction and non-reach (loss) are symbol 5R with time reduction and non-reach (loss), symbol 5R with time reduction and big hit, symbol 11 (10) R with time reduction and big hit, and symbol via small hit 6 (5) After the end of the big hit with R time reduction, before the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first special based on the hold information of the first start prize that can store up to four pieces before the big hit game state. It is a fluctuation pattern when the symbol fluctuates. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (A), the fluctuation time of P1A1-2 is 2000 ms (2 seconds).

Further, among the special figure 2 fluctuation patterns, the time reduction (loss) of P2A1-2 is a fluctuation pattern when the second special symbol executed first fluctuates after the end of the big hit with the time reduction. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (B), the fluctuation time of P2A1-2 is 60,000 ms (60 seconds). In this way, the execution time (2 seconds) of the variable display executed based on the hold information of the first start prize after the end of the jackpot with a short time is executed based on the hold information of the second start prize after the end of the advantageous state. The time is shorter than the execution time (60 seconds) of the variable display. Even during the time reduction, the fluctuation pattern other than when the second special symbol executed first after the end of the big hit with the time reduction is a fluctuation pattern other than P2A1-2.

The fluctuation time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 is also the time for increasing the number of reserved pieces to 4 in the time saving state. The period fluctuating in P2A1-2 is the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state, and the number of holds stored by the second hold storage buffer. This is an example of a predetermined period for making four pieces. In one predetermined period, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state a plurality of times (three times in the present embodiment). That is, the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be in the open state for the entire predetermined period.

In the present embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “open state notification”). Further, in the present embodiment, the promotion notification for prompting the winning of the game medium to the variable winning ball device 15 is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit with a short time. FIG. 34-9 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an open state notification and a promotion notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (A), the promotion notification is executed by temporarily stopping the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel. This promotion notification is also an open state notification because the variable winning ball device 15 is not notified unless it is in the open state. The arrows drawn on the right reel and the left reel indicate that the reels are fluctuating in the direction of the arrows. The middle reel is an example of the first movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100. In this way, by temporarily stopping the promotion notification symbol in the notification mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of holds stored in the second hold storage buffer during the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the big hit with a short time is the second hold storage. When the maximum number of pending information that can be stored in the buffer of 4 is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the maximum number has been reached is executed. FIG. 34-9 (B) is a diagram showing an example of arrival notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (B), the arrival notification is executed by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The arrows drawn on the left reel and the middle reel indicate that the reels are fluctuating in the direction of the arrows. The right reel is an example of the second movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100.

As shown in FIG. 34-9 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the middle reel when the fluctuation time of P2A1-2 shifts to 60 seconds, and is stored by the second hold storage buffer. When the number of holdings reaches 4, the right reel is stopped. According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually notify the player of the transition to the predetermined period and the arrival of the second number by the movable body.

In addition to the above-mentioned notification by the reel, the above-mentioned voice notification (“Aim at M”) is included in the open state notification and the promotion notification. The voice notification is performed when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state within a predetermined period. Further, the open state notification and the promotion notification include a notification for turning on the electric chew lamp 68SH016 in order to make the variable winning ball device 15 stand out (hereinafter, also referred to as “promotion lamp notification”). Further, for the open state notification and the promotion notification, the board surface lamp 68SH015 is turned off (hereinafter, also referred to as “board surface off”), so that the light from the electric chew lamp 68SH016 is relatively brightened, whereby the variable winning ball device 15 There is also a turn-off notification that makes the light stand out.

Whether or not these various notifications are executed changes depending on the number of reserved second special symbols. Further, it depends on whether or not a specific period (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, which is half of the 60 seconds of the fluctuation time of P2A1-2) has elapsed since the variable display of the identification information, which is first executed after the big hit with a short time, is started. Also changes. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a different notification mode depending on whether or not a specific period has elapsed, depending on whether the number of holds stored by the second hold storage buffer is 0 to 3 or 4. .. Here, the difference in the notification mode means that, in the case of the present embodiment, the combination of the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the board extinguishing is different. Further, the specific period is a period for notifying the player that the remaining time available for starting and winning the variable winning ball device 15 is short.

FIG. 34-10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reserved items and the notification mode. FIG. 34-10 shows the execution conditions of the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the board turning off. In FIG. 34-10, circles indicate execution and crosses indicate no execution. The voice notification is executed regardless of whether or not a specific period has elapsed when the number of held items is 0 to 3, and is not executed when the number of items held is 4. The promotion lamp notification is executed for the entire period of the predetermined period. The board turning off is executed when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and after a lapse of a specific period, and is not executed when the number of holdings is 4 or before the lapse of a specific period.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification mode differs depending on whether the number of reserved items is 0 to 3 or 4. When the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the number of holdings has not reached 4, so at least voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed to urge the player to start winning the variable winning ball device 15. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

On the other hand, when the number of holdings reaches 4, the number of holdings cannot be increased more than this. Therefore, by performing only the promotion lamp notification, the player is compared with the notification mode when the number of holdings is 0 to 3. It is a notification mode that is difficult for people to recognize. As a result, the notification has changed from an easy-to-recognize notification to a difficult-to-recognize notification, so that the player can more reliably recognize that the number of reserved pieces has reached 4, and fires the game medium when the number of reserved pieces is 4. You can avoid being aware of that. In this case, the player can stop the firing of the game medium by, for example, releasing his / her hand from the ball striking operation handle 5. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and a specific period has passed, the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the board surface turning off are all performed to make the player more open to the player and the variable winning ball device 15. It is possible to appeal to encourage the winning of the game medium. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. As described above, in the present embodiment, the promotion notification for urging the variable winning ball device 15 to win the game medium is executed in the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, and the number of stored information is stored in the predetermined period. When the upper limit of 4 hold information that can be stored in the second hold storage buffer is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Specifically, the player can firmly enjoy the lottery with the second special symbol.

Each of the above-described notifications and the like will be described using a timing chart. FIG. 34-11 is a timing chart showing aspects of “voice notification”, “promotion lamp notification”, “board lamp”, “reaching effect”, “middle reel”, and “right reel” during the time reduction. Of these, the "arrival effect" is an effect in which the arrival notification is performed by voice when the number of reserved items reaches 4, but as will be described later, the notification can be performed in a specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification. is there. FIG. 34-11 shows, as an example, a timing chart when the number of reserved first special symbols after a big hit with a short time is 0. Therefore, the change of the first special symbol does not occur before the change of the second special symbol. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 34-11, the number of reserved items is 3 before the elapse of the specific period, and the number of items on hold is 4 after the elapse of the specific period.

As shown in FIG. 34-11, when the jackpot with a short time is completed and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above. In addition, in FIG. 34-11, it is simplified so that the fluctuation starts immediately after the big hit ends, but in reality, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit after the big hit ends, and the variable winning ball device 15 starts. When a prize is won, the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts according to the fluctuation pattern of P2A1-2.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the promotion notification symbol and temporarily stops at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel rotates. There is. In that state, the number of pending items will be 3 by the time the specific period expires. The period from the start of fluctuation to the end of a specific period is defined as section A. When the specific period expires, since the number of reserved lamps has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the number of holdings reaches 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The temporary stop of the arrival notification symbol is performed for 14 seconds. Therefore, 14 seconds after the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect effect.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the promotion lamp notification and stops all reels. Next, various modes of notification and the like on the timing chart described with reference to FIG. 34-11 will be described.

FIG. 34-12 is a diagram showing a mode of the variable display device in the sections A and B and the achievement effect, a mode of voice notification output from the speaker 27, a mode of the variable winning ball device 15 and a board lamp 68SH015. FIG. 34-12 (A) is a diagram showing aspects of the variable display device, the voice notification, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 in the section A. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (A), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. "Aim for M!" Is output from the speaker 27 by voice notification. Further, since the board surface lamp 68SH015 is lit, the area around the variable winning ball device 15 is brightened by the board surface lamp 68SH015.

FIG. 34-12 (B) is a diagram showing aspects of the variable display device, the voice notification, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 in the section B. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (B), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. "Aim for M!" Is output from the speaker 27 by voice notification. Therefore, the variable display device and the voice notification are the same as those in the section A. The difference is that the board lamp 68SH015 goes out. By turning off the board lamp 68SH015, the area around the variable winning ball device 15 becomes dark, the variable winning ball device 15 becomes easier to recognize, and the player is encouraged to start winning the variable winning ball device 15. it can. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the specific period shorter than the predetermined period elapses and the number of reserved information does not reach 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 is before the specific period elapses. The notification is performed in a notification mode that is easier to recognize than the notification mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

FIGS. 34-12 (C) and 34-12 (D) are diagrams showing aspects of the variable display device, the sound, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 when the number of reserved pieces is four. The reason why the two figures are used is that when it is determined that the identification information is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state, the specific mode is different from the notification mode of the arrival notification. This is to be notified. Specifically, the output sound differs depending on whether the time-saving jackpot is controlled by the variable display of the first second special symbol after the time-saving jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as "holding ream") or not. ..

What is common to both FIGS. 34-12 (C) and (D) is that when the number of reserved items reaches four, the arrival notification symbol on the right reel is temporarily stopped. Then, when there is no hold ream, as shown in FIG. 34-12 (C), the speaker 27 notifies "arrival" as an arrival effect. Further, the board lamp 68SH015 lights in the same manner as in the section A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol. According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by temporarily stopping the identification information as the notification mode.

On the other hand, when there is a hold ream, the speaker 27 notifies "Congratulations" as shown in FIG. 34-12 (D). Further, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit in rainbow colors, unlike the case of section A. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information first executed after the advantageous state, the effect control microcomputer 100 is used to notify the arrival. Notify in a specific mode (“Congratulations”) different from the notification mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to an advantageous state according to a specific mode. You can enhance the feeling.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information first executed after the advantageous state, the specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification is used. Notify. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to an advantageous state according to a specific mode. You can enhance the feeling.

The timing chart described with reference to FIG. 34-11 shows a timing chart when the number of reserved first special symbols after the big hit with time reduction is 0, but the number of reserved first special symbols after the big hit with time reduction is 1. There may be a case where the number of the second special symbol is 0 or more. Therefore, a timing chart will be described when the number of reserved first special symbols is one or more and the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 after a big hit with a short time.

FIG. 34-13 is a timing chart showing aspects of "voice notification", "right-handed voice notification", "promotion lamp notification", "board lamp", "reaching effect", "middle reel", and "right reel". is there. Of these, the new "right-handed voice notification" is a notification that outputs a voice such as "right-handed!" And instructs right-handed. In the example shown in FIG. 34-13, the number of reserved items is 3 before the elapse of the specific period, and the number of items on hold is 4 after the elapse of the specific period. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, another promotion notice different from the promotion notice (“right-handed”). ! ”) Is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute other promotion notifications according to a short variable display time.

As shown in FIG. 34-13, when the jackpot with a short time is completed, the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 and the number of reserved first special symbols is 1 or more, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. To be started. With the start of this variable display, right-handed voice notification is started. On the other hand, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the voice notification (“Aim at M”) is not performed, but the promotion lamp notification is performed, and the board lamp 68SH015 is lit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, the right-handed voice notification different from the promotion notification by the voice notification is performed. Run. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute other promotion notifications according to a short variable display time.

When the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit during the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is started and won a prize, the number of reserved second special symbols becomes one. When the change of the first special symbol ends, the change of the second special symbol held by the change pattern of P2A1-2 starts.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the promotion notification symbol and temporarily stops at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel rotates. There is. In that state, the number of pending items will be 3 by the time the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of reserved lamps has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the number of holdings reaches 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. When 14 seconds have passed since the arrival notification symbol was temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect effect.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the promotion lamp notification and stops all reels.

In this embodiment, a reel is used as the variable display device. The reel is rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, but if the reel is rotated or stopped within a short time, the reel motor 68SH010 may step out due to a delay or advance due to the moment of inertia of the load of the reel or the like. Therefore, in order to secure the reel stop operation time, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time (specific time) of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, the number of hold information stored by the second hold storage buffer is increased. When four or four are reached, the arrival notification by voice is executed without temporarily stopping the identification information.

This is because the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds, so that the reels can be rotated and stopped within a short period of time. For example, when the remaining time reaches 4 with 14.5 seconds, the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds and then the rotation is started, but at that point, the remaining time is 0. 5 seconds. Therefore, the rotation and the stop are performed 0.5 seconds later, and the rotation and the stop are performed within a short time.

The timing chart when the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less and the number of reserved pieces reaches four will be described.

FIG. 34-14 is a timing chart showing aspects of “voice notification”, “promotion lamp notification”, “board lamp”, “reaching effect”, “middle reel”, and “right reel”. In the example shown in FIG. 34-14, the number of reserved items is 3 before the elapse of the specific period, the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, and the number of retained items is 4.

As shown in FIG. 34-14, when the jackpot with a short time is completed and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the promotion notification symbol and temporarily stops at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel rotates. There is. In that state, the number of pending items will be 3 by the time the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of reserved lamps has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the number of reserved pieces reaches 4 in the remaining 15 seconds or less, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 keeps the arrival notification symbol on the right reel rotated without temporarily stopping it, but performs the effect effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time of the predetermined period is less than or equal to the specific time, the number of reserved information stored in the second reserved storage buffer is the number of reserved information that can be stored in the second reserved storage buffer. When the upper limit of four is reached, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by voice without temporarily stopping the identification information. According to such a configuration, arrival notification can be performed while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the promotion lamp notification and stops all reels. According to such a configuration, arrival notification can be performed while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

Next, the process for realizing the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowchart. In the present embodiment, the main board 31 includes the timer interrupt process and the special symbol process process in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9, and the effect control board 80 includes the effect control main process and the effect control process process of FIG. The same process as is performed. Hereinafter, among the processes performed in the present embodiment, such as the special symbol stop process, the processes different from the above-described processes will be described with reference to the flowchart.

FIG. 34-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the present embodiment.

In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and ends the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, if the jackpot flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

When the big hit flag is set, such as when it is decided to make a big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction or a big hit without a symbol 5R time reduction, the CPU 56 is a flag set when the time reduction state is controlled. When the flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and when the special state flag is set, the special state flag is reset (68SH001), and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines. Depending on the type of the jackpot, a process for transmitting either the jackpot start 1 designation command or the jackpot start 2 designation command (big hit start designation command) is performed (S135).

As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is symbol 5R, no time saving jackpot, the jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is symbol 5R with a short time and is a jackpot, the jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

Further, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot control timer (S136). After that, in the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, the large winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large winning opening is opened and the round is started.

Further, according to the type of jackpot specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each jackpot type stored in the ROM 54 described above is referred to, and the number of releases (for example, 5 times). ), Opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and the like, data indicating an opening mode is set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S138), and the process ends. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the pre-opening processing of the large winning opening.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133 described above, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit opening control timer used for the small hit opening control by referring to the small hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 (for example, Data indicating an opening mode such as (5 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and interval time between openings is set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening preprocessing.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is due to the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). When the time saving flag is not set in S142, the time saving state is not set, and the process proceeds to 68SHS005 described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving state is set, so that the total value of the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol in the time saving state is counted. The total time reduction counter as a counting means is updated by -1 subtraction (S143).

The total time reduction counter that is subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when it is controlled to the first time reduction state after the big hit with 5R symbol in the big hit end process of FIG. When it is controlled to the second time saving state after the big hit of the type other than the big hit without the symbol time reduction, it is set to 11 times by S168, and by S143, it is subtracted and updated every time the variation display which is the off display result is executed once. .. The total time reduction counter is used to determine both whether or not the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied and whether or not the end condition of the second time reduction state is satisfied.

Next, based on confirming whether or not the special symbol pointer is the data indicating the "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end of the variation display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S146). The special figure 2 time reduction counter, which is subtracted and updated in S146, is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when controlled to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state after the end of the big hit game. In the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time reduction state, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time reduction state. Will be done. The special figure 2 time reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 every time the variation display which is the display result of the second special symbol being removed is executed once.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter becomes "0", one of the end conditions of the first time reduction state is satisfied, or one of the end conditions of the second time reduction state is satisfied. Since it is time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state that is being executed. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not "0", in order to confirm whether or not one other end condition of the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied. Then proceed to S148.

In S148, in order to confirm whether or not the end condition of the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state being executed is satisfied based on the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time-saving state. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter that has been subtracted and updated in S143 has become "0" (S148). If the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0" in S148, the process proceeds to S152, which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time reduction counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

In S149 and S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol has become the number of end conditions, and by S148, the first special symbol and the first special symbol and Executed to end the running 1st time saving state or 2nd time saving state when it is determined that the total number of fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol has reached the number of times of the end condition. ..

In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set time reduction counter is reset (S150). Then, a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed according to the end of the time saving condition based on the number of fluctuation display times in the time saving state (S151).

The 68SHS003 further performs a process for transmitting a special normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS002). Then, a special normal flag indicating that the special normal state is set is set (68SH003), 30 is set in the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times in the special normal state (68SH004), and the process proceeds to S152.

In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S152), and the processing ends. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

When the time saving flag is not set in S142 described above, it is not the time saving state, so it is confirmed whether or not it is the special normal state (68SH005). If the 68SH005 is not in the special normal state, the process proceeds to S152. In the special normal state of 68SH005, the special state counter is updated by -1 subtraction (68SH006). In 68SH007, it is confirmed whether or not the special normal counter is 0 (68SH007). If the special normal counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S152. When the special normal counter is 0, a process for transmitting a special normal state end command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS008), and the process proceeds to S152.

In such a special symbol stop process, according to S142 to S151, when the first time is shortened, the execution of one deviation variation display of the second special symbol and the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 When either of the execution of the out-of-times variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, according to S142 to S151, in the second time saving state, the second special symbol is executed 7 times and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed 11 times in total. When any of the above is satisfied, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

FIG. 34-16 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in the present embodiment. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer set before the jackpot end process is executed (68SHS101). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (68SHS102). If it has not passed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed, in the current jackpot game state, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot type to be terminated is a 5R time-saving jackpot based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55. (68SHS103).

When the type of jackpot to be terminated is a jackpot with no 5R time reduction, a process for transmitting a special normal state specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS104). Then, a special normal flag indicating that the special normal state is set is set (68SHS105), 30 is set in the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times in the special normal state (68SHS106), and the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

In the 68SHS107, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (68SHS107) in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal processing.

If the type of jackpot ending by 68SHS103 is not a jackpot with symbol 5R time reduction, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot ending with symbol 5R time reduction is a jackpot (S163). When the type of jackpot to end is symbol 5R with time reduction and jackpot, in order to control to the first time reduction state, as the end condition of the first time reduction state, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to "1" (second special symbol). (S164), and set the data of "5" (corresponding to the total fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol 5 times) in the total time reduction counter (S165). .. Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

When the type of jackpot that ends in S163 is not a jackpot with symbol 5R time reduction, the type of jackpot that ends is a jackpot type other than the jackpot with symbol 5R time reduction and the jackpot without symbol 5R time reduction, and is controlled to the second time reduction state. In order to do so, as the end condition of the second time reduction state, the data of "7" (corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol once) is set in the special figure 2 time reduction counter (S167), and the total time reduction counter is set to "7". 11 ”(corresponding to the total variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 11 times) is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

In S170, a time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

As a result, it is controlled to the first time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state with the symbol 5R time reduction, and to the second time reduction state after the end of the big hit type big hit game state other than the symbol 5R time reduction big hit and the symbol 5R time reduction no big hit. Will be done. The end conditions for the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are individually defined by the number of times the variation is displayed only for the second special symbol and the total number of times the variation display is opened for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. To.

In such a big hit end process, according to S164 and S165, after the big hit game state with a symbol 5R time reduction is completed, the second special symbol is executed once and the first special symbol and the second special are displayed. The setting is made to control the first time reduction state until any one of the execution of the deviation variation display of the symbol five times in total is established. In addition, according to S167 and S168, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the big hit of the symbol 5R time reduction and the big hit without the symbol 5R time reduction, the execution of the 7 times out-of-order variation display of the 2nd special symbol and the 1st special symbol and the 1st The control is set to the second time saving state until any of the execution of the out-of-order fluctuation display of the two special symbols a total of 11 times is established.

Next, when controlling the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state, a process of transmitting control information (operation opening opening command) indicating control to the open state to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 34-17 is a flowchart showing the processing during the first time reduction in which the operation port opening command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. The process during the first time reduction in FIG. 34-17 is included in the special symbol change process (S303 in FIG. 10).

In the process during the first variation of the time reduction, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it is the operation port opening timing for opening the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS201). When the operation port opening timing is reached, the operation port opening command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS202), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS203), and the process is completed.

When it is not the operation port opening timing in the 68SHS201, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it is the operating port closing timing that closes the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS204). When the operation port closing timing is reached, the operation port closing command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS205), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS206), and the process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is shown that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state a plurality of times in one predetermined period, and when it is controlled to the open state, it is controlled to the open state. The control information is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 34-18 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S310) in the present embodiment. In the small hit post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning validity period timer by -1 subtraction (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is used to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. Determines whether or not is in the ON state (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is turned on in S444, it means that the V prize is detected during the V prize valid period, and the V prize flag indicating that the V prize is detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting the V prize designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V prize has been generated.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has been completed. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening / closing member to return the V winning region 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hit game state, if the right-handed hit is made according to the right-handed promotion notification described later, the game ball is allowed to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. The game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 always wins the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the jackpot flag is set in S449, and the jackpot game state is controlled.

Next, the CPU 56 converts the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot temporary type buffer in S81 into the jackpot type buffer according to the fact that it is determined that the data will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. Formally memorize (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is reset once (S451), and the special normal flag is reset (68SH304).

Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command or a jackpot start 4 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Further, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the opening count (for example, 10 times or 5 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time (round) are referred to according to the jackpot type. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as a large winning opening closing time) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V prize occurs in the small hit game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big hit game state does not occur. Therefore, in S81, the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer is deleted (S456), and the special normal state specification command is used. Is processed to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS301). Then, a special normal flag indicating that it is in the special normal state is set (68SHS302), 30 is set in the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times in the special normal state (68SHS303), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the normal process (S300) is updated (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

Next, the processing on the effect control microcomputer 100 side will be described. FIG. 34-19 is a flowchart showing the time saving time variation processing. The time saving time variation processing of FIG. 34-19 is included in the effect symbol variation processing (S802 of FIG. 19). Further, the time-saving time-varying processing indicates the processing during the variable display of the first second special symbol after the time-saving big hit.

In the time saving time variation processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the fourth hold has won the start (68SHS401). This can be confirmed by the second hold storage number specification command. When the fourth hold wins a start prize, the rotation of the temporarily stopped middle reel is started (68SHS402). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining time is equal to or less than the specific time (68SHS403). When the remaining time is less than or equal to the specific time, the process proceeds to 68SHS405. When the remaining time is not less than the specified time, the arrival notification symbol of the right reel is temporarily stopped (68SHS404).

The effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not there is a hold ream (68SHS405). Whether or not there is a pending ream can be confirmed by command C2XX. When there is a hold ream, "Congratulations" is output from the speaker 27, and the process ends. When there is no pending sequence, "arrival" is output from the speaker 27, and the process ends.

In 68SHS401, when the fourth hold has not won a start prize, it is confirmed whether or not a specific period has passed (68SHS408). When the specific period has passed, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reserved items is less than 4 (68SHS409). When the number of reserved lamps is less than 4, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned off (68SHS410), and the process is terminated.

In the 68SHS408, when the specific period has not elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation port opening command has been received (68SHS411). If the operation port opening command has not been received, the process ends as it is. When the operation port opening command is received, it is confirmed whether or not the number of holdings is less than 4 (68SHS412). If the number of pending items is not less than 4, the process ends. When the number of reserved items is less than 4, voice notification is performed (68SHS413) and the process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state by receiving the operation port opening command. According to such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 can surely perform the notification by the operation port opening command transmitted from the CPU 56 that controls the variable winning device.

[Main effects on feature 068SH]
(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) capable of playing games.
A variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15, etc.) that can change between a closed state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state.
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009, etc.) that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of the game medium in the variable winning device and derives and displays the display result.
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing hold information related to variable display that has not been started yet,
When the variable winning device is in the open state, a notification means (microcomputer 100 for effect control or the like) for notifying that the variable winning device is in the open state, and
With
The notification means is when the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means is the first number (0 to 3 or the like) and when the number of the reserved information is larger than the first number (4 or the like). (As shown in FIG. 34-10, when the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification, or the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the board are turned off, while the number of holdings is different. A game machine characterized in that when there are four, only the promotion lamp notification is performed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1).
The notification mode in the case of the second number is a mode that is more difficult to recognize than the notification mode in the case of the first number (as shown in FIG. 34-10, when the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the voice is spoken. Notification and promotion lamp notification, or voice notification, promotion lamp notification, and board off. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is 4, only promotion lamp notification is performed. Therefore, when the number of holdings is 4, the number of holdings is 0 to 3. It is harder to recognize than when it is an individual).

According to such a configuration, it is possible not to be conscious of firing the game medium when the number of reserved information is the second number.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
A predetermined period (30 seconds, etc.) is provided for increasing the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means to the second number.
A movable body control means for controlling a first movable body (middle reel or the like) and a second movable body (left reel or the like) different from the first movable body is provided.
When the movable body control means operates (stops, etc.) the first movable body when the predetermined period shifts to the predetermined period, and the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means reaches the second number. To operate the second movable body (stop operation, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually notify the player of the transition to the predetermined period and the arrival of the second number by the movable body.

(4) The gaming machine according to (3).
A variable winning device control means (CPU 56, etc.) for controlling the variable winning device is provided.
The variable winning device control means controls the variable winning device to be in the open state a plurality of times in the predetermined period, and when controlling to the open state, controls to indicate that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state. Information (operation port opening command, etc.) is transmitted to the notification means (68SHS202, etc. in FIG. 34-17).
By receiving the control information, the notification means notifies that the variable winning device is in the open state (YES in 68SHS411 and 68SHS413 in 68SHS412 in FIG. 34-19).

According to such a configuration, the notification means can reliably perform notification by the control information transmitted from the variable winning device control means that controls the variable winning device.

(5) The gaming machine according to (3) or (4).
When a specific period (30 seconds or the like) shorter than the predetermined period elapses after shifting to the predetermined period (section A or the like in FIG. 34-12), the number of reserved information stored by the reserved storage means is the said. When the second number has not been reached, the notification means notifies in a notification mode that is easier to recognize than the notification mode before the lapse of the specific period (board lamp in section B shown in FIG. 34-12 (B)). By turning off the light, the variable winning ball device 15 is made to stand out so that it can be notified in an easy-to-recognize notification mode, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Regarding the above-described embodiment, a game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on a variable display result of a special symbol or a production symbol, and a variable winning ball device provided in the game area. Combined with a game machine (so-called second-class game machine) that shifts to the jackpot game state based on the game ball winning (V winning) in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) in (so-called character) Although the game machine (so-called type 1 type 2 mixer) has been described, it may be applied to the type 1 game machine.

Specifically, since the first-class gaming machine has a hold, by applying the feature unit 068SH, the number of stored hold information is the first number (0 to 3), and By making the notification mode different from that of the second number (4 pieces), which is larger than the first number, and applying the feature unit 069SH, the number of reserved information stored in the predetermined period can be increased to the second number. When the upper limit number (4 pieces) of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage buffer is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number has been reached is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved information is set to 4 each, but other numbers such as 8 may be used.

In the present embodiment, a voice such as "arrival" is output as the arrival notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrival notification may be a minute sound output when the game control board transmits a command and the effect control board receives the command.

In the present embodiment, reels are used as the first movable body and the second movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first movable body and the second movable body may be accessories. As the accessory of the first movable body, for example, the accessory that appears when the transition to a predetermined period may be used, and as the accessory of the second movable body, for example, the accessory that appears when the second number is reached. May be used. In any case, by notifying using the movable body, the variation of the notification can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, 1 minute is used as the predetermined period, 30 seconds is used as the specific period, and 15 seconds is used as the specific time, but the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined period, the specific period, and the specific time may be appropriately determined for each model (for example, the number of times and the time when the variable winning device is opened).

In the present embodiment, the variable display device is a drum type using a reel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display device using a liquid crystal, an organic EL, project mapping, or the like may be used.

In the present embodiment, an embodiment in which a prize is promoted to the variable winning ball device 15 and an arrival notification is performed has been described, but the game medium is in a closed state in which winning is not possible or is difficult to win, and the game medium is won in a closed state rather than the closed state. The variable winning device that can be easily changed to an open state is not limited to the winning ball device that can always win a prize, such as the first starting winning opening 13. In this case, the notification means may be used as a notification means for notifying the winning device of the winning device, instead of the notification means for notifying that the variable winning device is in the open state when the variable winning device is in the open state. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the player to win a prize, and the player can recognize that the winning ball device should be clearly aimed at by the notification, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. This can be prevented and the player can be prevented from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

In the present embodiment, the notification mode is different between the first number and the second number, which is larger than the first number, but the notification mode is different (for example, stepwise) depending on the number of reserved items. You may do so. That is, the notification mode when the number of holdings is 1, the notification mode when the number of holdings is 2, the notification mode when the number of holdings is 3, and the notification mode when the number of holdings is 4 may be different from each other. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do.

In the present embodiment, the notification mode is different depending on the combination of voice, lamp, and reel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notification mode may be different for each of the lamp, the voice, and the reel, such as changing the color of the lamp, changing the sound, and changing the movement of the reel. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do. Further, the remaining time in a predetermined period may be displayed digitally or by a bar.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to correspond to a game machine having diversified specifications and game methods, the player can perform the right-handed or left-handed notification that has been performed in the conventional game machine. It is possible to solve the problem that it is difficult to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage or to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. This not only makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevents the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period, but also only the player who has been playing the game conventionally. Instead, even beginners can easily enjoy the game, which has the effect of promoting an increase in the playing population.

[Main effects on featured parts 244F and 245F]
(1) As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and 33-1 (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. Since it is possible to control the display so that the remaining number of times is not displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and 33-3 (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. Since it is possible to control the display without updating the display of the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of times of the variable display that can be executed during the time saving state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

(3) As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) to (E), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. By erasing the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the erased remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to control the display so as not to display the remaining number of times. As a result, it is suggested that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated by erasing and redisplaying the display of the remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of times of the variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further increased to the player. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state. By changing the color of the time-saving remaining number image 96, it is possible to produce an effect suggesting that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time-saving state can be further increased. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

(5) As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 96, By performing display control such as the lock image 96A that superimposes and displays a predetermined image suggesting that the remaining number of times is not updated on the time saving remaining number image 96, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be determined. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

(6) In the time saving state, (B) to (G) in FIG. 33-1, S927 and S928 in FIG. 33-2 (B), (B) to (G) in FIG. 33-3, FIG. 33-4. As shown in S927, S928, etc. of (B), when at least the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the time is shortened. The remaining number of times of the second special figure is displayed as the number of times. Then, in the time saving state, (H) in FIG. 33-1, S927, S929 in FIG. 33-2 (B), (H) in FIG. 33-2, S927, S929 in FIG. 33-4 (B), etc. As shown, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second special figure until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. , The remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

(7) As shown in [Example of first display control restriction], the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second until the second condition is satisfied. When the number of remaining times is less than two, even if the first variable display is executed, the display control is restricted so as not to display the remaining number of times, so that it depends on the gaming state. Since the remaining number of times is displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

(8) As shown in [Specific notification example] shown in FIG. 33-6, the first variable notification is performed based on the number of times of the first variable display in the time saving state becomes the specific number or more. In a game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of times of the variable display and the second variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state by the specific notification.

(9) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 and the like, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the change effect is executed according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the production mode of the specific production, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by the fun of the production.

[Main modifications regarding the feature units 244F and 245F]
(1) Regarding the above-mentioned first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the time saving remaining number is not displayed. Examples of display control to be performed include (a) display control for changing the time-saving remaining number image 96 to another image such as a character image so that the time-saving remaining number is not displayed, or (b). Other display controls such as display control may be performed so that the time saving remaining number is not displayed by concealing the time saving remaining number image 96 so as to cover it with another image such as a character image.

(2) Regarding the above-mentioned second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is not updated. As a display control example, (a) the display of the time saving remaining number is updated by redisplaying the time saving remaining number image 96 which has not been updated by changing the time saving remaining number image 96 to another image such as a character image. No display control, (b) Display control that does not update the display of the time saving remaining number as a result by returning to the original display by trying to subtract and update the time saving remaining number image 96, (c) The image of the time saving remaining number image 96 Display control that suggests not updating by changing the size (for example, changing to an extremely small image) and does not update, or (d) Message that the time saving remaining number is not updated in the vicinity of the image of the time saving remaining number image 96. Other display controls such as display control that does not update by suggesting that the image is not updated may be performed.

(3) Regarding the above-mentioned first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is deleted. As a control, (a) the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied is the second until the second condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the variable display is exceeded, the display of the remaining number of time reductions is deleted, and the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second condition of the end of the time reduction state. When the number of remaining times of the second variable display until is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times, control is performed so that the display of the remaining number of times of time saving is not erased, or (b) the first variable display until the first condition of ending the time saving state is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the second variable display exceeds the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied, the first variable display and the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied. 2 When the remaining number of times of the total number of variable displays is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition of the end of the time saving state is satisfied, the control of erasing the display of the remaining number of times of time saving is executed. You may.

(4) In the first display control and the second display control, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is until the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the second variable display is exceeded, the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of times of the variable display in the time saving state, and at least the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied is displayed. And when the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the display control for displaying the remaining number of times of the total number of times as the remaining number of times. May control the display as follows. When the remaining number of times of the total number exceeds the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, and when the remaining number of times of the total number of times is less than the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the display mode of the time-saving remaining number image 96 may be different. In that case, different display modes include different display positions, different display colors, different display sizes, and different display shapes (fonts, etc.), which are currently displayed. Is included.

(5) As the above-mentioned specific notification example, the following control may be executed in addition to the above-mentioned control, or may be executed together with the above-mentioned control. A special image such as a special character image is displayed based on the number of times of the first variable display being executed becomes a specific number or more in the time saving state to notify the player that the situation is disadvantageous to the player. (Suggest) Control. An image of a wide display area equal to or larger than a predetermined range of the display area of the effect display device 9, such as changing the background image based on the number of times of the first variable display being executed in the time saving state becomes a specific number or more. By changing the above, control is performed to notify (suggest) that the situation will be disadvantageous for the player. Control to notify by directly displaying a message indicating that the situation is disadvantageous to the player based on the number of times of the first variable display being executed becomes a specific number or more in the time saving state. do.

(6) Regarding the time-saving remaining number image 96, an image that can identify whether the "total remaining number" is displayed or the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed is displayed as follows. May be good. (A) Regarding the time-saving remaining number image 96, the image color may be different between when the "total remaining number" is displayed and when the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed. (B) Time saving remaining number For the image 96, the size of the image may be different depending on whether the "total remaining number" is displayed or the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed. .. (C) Time saving remaining number For the image 96, the shape of the image (character font, character) is displayed when the "total remaining number" is displayed and when the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed. The thickness of the characters, the color of the characters, etc.) may be different. (D) Time saving remaining number For the image 96, a message indicating which of "total remaining number" and "second special figure remaining number" is displayed may be directly displayed.

(7) With respect to the time-saving remaining number image 96, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second until the second condition is satisfied. In addition to when the remaining number of times of the variable display is exceeded, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is until the second condition is satisfied. Even when the number of remaining times of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display, the remaining number of times of the second special figure may be displayed as the remaining number of time reductions.

(8) Regarding the time-saving remaining number image 96, the total remaining number of times, which is the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied, and the second until the second condition is satisfied. Both the number of times of variable display and the number of remaining times of the second special figure may be displayed in parallel.

(9) Regarding the [specific notification example], a predetermined specific number of times such as 4 times is set in the time saving state, and the specific notification is executed when the first variable display of the specific number of times is executed. An example is shown. However, not limited to this, the specific number of times set as the execution condition of the specific notification is set to the number of reserved storages (0 to 4) 9 of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state, and is equal to the number of reserved storages. After the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the specific notification may be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is further executed.

(10) In the first display control and the second display control described above, an example is shown in which the display of the remaining number of time reductions can be updated at the end of the variable display in the time reduction state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time saving state, control may be performed so that the display of the remaining time saving number can be updated at the start of the variable display.

[Other means configuration example 1]
The above-described embodiment includes the following means configuration.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (a jackpot game state in which the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 opens, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, effect symbols, etc.). Machine 1 etc.)
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) that stores information related to variable display as hold storage information, and
Specific effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S881 to S896 in FIG. 31, S901 to S906 in FIG. 32, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect in FIG. 29, etc.)
A change effect execution means (micro for effect control) capable of executing a change effect (such as the first change effect on hold to the fourth change effect on hold in FIGS. 29 (D) to (G)) for changing the effect mode of the specific effect. It is equipped with a computer 100, FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31, etc.).
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in response to the variation display being executed in the specific variation pattern (the variation pattern of the second special symbol for the first time after the end of the symbol 4R time saving big hit game state, etc.). (S881 etc. in FIGS. 30 and 31),
The change effect execution means executes the change effect according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed (FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31 and the like).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the fun of the production.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
When the fluctuation display is executed in the specific fluctuation pattern, a promotion effect for promoting the storage of the hold storage information in the hold storage means (a prize of "save hold!" In FIGS. 29 (B) to 29 (G)). Further equipped with promotion effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S886 in FIG. 31, etc.) for executing a prize promotion effect for displaying the promotion image 9B).
The change effect execution means executes the change effect in relation to an increase in the number of reserved storage information (FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31 and the like).

According to such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize the relationship between the change effect and the number of reserved storage information.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
When the change effect is executed, the change effect execution means produces an effect of increasing the number of reach lines that increases the number of lines in the reach mode formed in connection with the execution of the specific effect (FIGS. 29 (D) to FIG. 29D). As in (G), the reach line increase effect of increasing the number of reach lines by the look-ahead effect symbol 94 according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the relationship between the change effect and the number of reserved storage information visually easy to understand.

(4) In the game machine of (3) above
The change effect executing means increases the number of lines in the same reach mode in the effect of increasing the number of reach lines (as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the same “7” as the number of reserved storage information increases. Increase the number of reach lines for the design, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the development and design of the effect control.

(5) In the game machine of (2) or (3) above,
During the reach line increase effect, the display result of the reach line symbol corresponding to each of the reserved storage information of FIGS. 29 (H) to 29 (J) suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is obtained is displayed. Further equipped with suggestion effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S893 in FIG. 31, etc.) for executing suggestion effect (such as suggestion effect suggesting whether or not to be on hold).
The suggestion effect is executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of lines in the reach mode (suggestion effect period in FIG. 30, S893 to S895 in FIG. 31, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the development and design of the effect control.

(6) In the game machine of (2) above
The promotion effect executing means ends the promotion effect when the number of reserved storage information reaches a predetermined value (FIGS. 29 (G), (H), S890, S891, etc. in FIG. 31).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the production by suppressing the promotion production more than necessary.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of reserved storage information by an effect using a series of images (such as the effect of the determination effect moving images of FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O)). (FIGS. 29 (A) to (O), 883 in FIG. 31, S906 in FIG. 32, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a series of images.

[Other means configuration example 2]
The above-described embodiment further includes the following means configuration.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations.
Variable winning means that allows the game medium to enter in a predetermined state (V-judgment winning device 87, etc.),
A specific area (V winning area 870, etc.) provided in the variable winning means and into which the game medium can enter, and
The first state control means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S305 to S307, etc. in FIG. 10) that controls an advantageous state (symbol jackpot, etc.) based on the variation display result, and
Based on the variation display result, the game medium is controlled to the predetermined state so that the game medium can enter the specific area in the variable winning means (V winning, etc.) (small hit state, etc.), and the specific state is specified in the predetermined state. Second state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S308 to S310 in FIG. 10, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10) for controlling the advantageous state (big hit via small hit, etc.) based on the entry of the game medium into the region. Etc.) and
A predetermined effect means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (such as an effect of displaying a V winning aura image 95 as a round number suggestion effect in FIG. 20) based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state. A microcomputer 100 for use, S842-S844 in FIG. 26, etc.)
In the predetermined state, a predetermined period (0.1 second x 10 times of opening and 1 second of closing is repeated, etc.) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (10, etc.) of gaming media are placed in the variable winning means. Finished based on the entry,
The predetermined effect means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect according to the number of the game media that have entered the variable winning means after the game medium has entered the specific area (as shown in FIG. 24, a small hit). The color of the V winning aura image 95 changes in the round number suggestion effect of FIG. 20 according to the number of winnings (1 to 10 or the like) to the V determination winning device 87 during the game state).

According to such a configuration, after the game medium has entered the specific area, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed according to the number of the game media that have entered the variable winning means, so that the effect of the game is improved. be able to.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
When the game medium enters the specific area in the predetermined state, the approach notification effect means (small) for executing the approach notification effect (V winning notification, etc. in FIG. 20) for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area. Further, a process of displaying the V winning image 94 of FIG. 20 in the opening process of S808 of FIG. 19 in the hit effect) is further provided.
The predetermined effect means executes the predetermined effect in relation to the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIG. 20, when the V prize image 94 is displayed, the V prize aura image 95 is displayed, etc.). ).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined effect is executed in connection with the execution of the approach notification effect for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area, the effect further improves the interest of the game. be able to.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (as shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (E) and FIG. 23 (A), V. The color of the winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow according to the number of winnings in the V determination winning device 87).

According to such a configuration, since the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect and the game that has entered the variable winning means The number of media can draw the player's attention.

(4) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The advantageous state is selected from a plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages (a plurality of types of hit types in FIG. 2 and the like).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state (FIG. 23 (B)). As described above, the selection ratio of a plurality of types of effect patterns having different color stepwise change patterns of the V winning aura image 95 differs depending on the determined number of jackpot rounds, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state. Since the player can recognize the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) that stores information related to variable display as hold storage information, and
It is further provided with pre-reading determination means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S1215, S1225, etc. in FIG. 11) for determining whether or not the variation display that has not been started is controlled to the advantageous state.
The predetermined effect means can change the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode based on the hold storage information including the hold storage information in the advantageous state ([V winning image aura color]. A modified example of producing a continuous notification effect by holding] etc.).

According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed to a specific mode based on the fact that the hold storage means includes the hold storage information that is in an advantageous state, so that the hold storage means is in an advantageous state. By making it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory information is included, the interest of the game can be further improved by the production.

Next, other effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 and the like, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the change effect is executed according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the production mode of the specific production, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by the fun of the production.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), the change effect is executed in connection with the increase in the number of reserved storage information due to the winning promotion effect, so that the change in the specific effect is performed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognizable the relationship between the effect and the number of reserved stored information.

(3) As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, a reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines in accordance with an increase in the number of second reserved storage information is executed. As a result, the relationship between the change effect and the number of second reserved storage information can be made easy to understand visually.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to 29 (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, the reach mode is increased by increasing the number of reach lines of the same "7" symbol in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved storage information. It is possible to facilitate the development and design of the production control, for example, it is not necessary to consider the production pattern regarding the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player, such as different the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player depending on the type of. ..

(5) As shown in FIG. 30, the development design of the effect control can be facilitated by allowing the suggestion effect period to be executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of reach lines.

(6) As shown in FIGS. 29 (G) and 29 (H), the winning promotion effect is promoted more than necessary by ending when the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit (4). By suppressing the production, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the production.

(7) As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O), by executing a specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of reserved storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a judgment effect movie. The entertainment of the game can be improved by the production.

(8) By executing the round number suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 20, after the game medium has entered the specific area, the V winning aura image 95 is according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87. Since the effect mode of the predetermined effect such as the effect of displaying is changed, the game can be improved by the effect without delaying the progress of the game.

(9) As shown in FIG. 20, the round number suggestion effect by the V-winning aura image 95 is executed in connection with the effect of notifying the V-winning by displaying the V-winning image 94. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(10) As shown in FIG. 20, since the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87. , The number of rounds suggestion effect and the number of game balls that have entered the V-judgment winning device 87 can be noticed by the player.

(11) As shown in FIG. 23, the number of rounds (rounds) in the big hit game state in which the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 is controlled based on the V prize in the small hit game state. Since it can be changed stepwise according to the advantage of the number), the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, so that the interest of the game can be further improved by the production.

(12) As shown in [Modification example of performing the hold continuous notification effect by the V winning image aura color], if the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the hold storage information that becomes a symbol big hit and the small hit are included in the hold storage information. Since the effect mode of the effect of displaying the aura image can be changed to a specific mode based on the inclusion of at least one of the hold memory information, the hold memory division method is via a symbol jackpot or a small hit. By making it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory information that is the big hit of the game is included, the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the production.

(13) As shown in FIG. 21, at least one of the hold storage information determined to be a symbol big hit or the hold storage information determined to be a small hit when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state. Since the hold continuous notification effect can be executed based on the fact that one of them is included, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the effect.

(14) As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a plurality of totals of the hold storage information determined to be a symbol big hit and the hold storage information determined to be a small hit are stored, the hold notification effect is generated. Since it is executed, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that there are a plurality of hold memory information that can be a big hit, so that the effect further improves the interest of the game. Can be done.

(15) As shown in FIG. 21, a blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hit game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to preferably execute the hold continuous notification effect for the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

(16) In the hold continuous notification effect, for example, "+3 BONUS" in FIG. 21 (C) and "+ 4 BONUS" in FIG. 21 (D), the total number of hold storage information that can be a big hit in the hold storage information. When the number is less than a predetermined number (3 pieces, etc.) and when the number is more than a predetermined number (4 pieces, etc.), the effect mode of the special effect to be executed is different, so that the hold continuous notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes. The crab player can be noticed.

(17) As shown in FIG. 24, a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and via a small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, which is a number of rounds that is advantageous for the player. Since the ratio of executing the continuous notification effect is different, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to how many times the jackpot, which is an advantageous number of rounds, is executed when the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

(18) In the hold continuous notification effect determination table, when the total number of hold stations for the symbol 15R time saving big hit and the small hit via 16 (15) R time saving big hit is 2 or more among the big hit types, the hold continuous notification effect The data is set to run. As a result, when the hold continuous notification effect is executed, the player can store a plurality of hold storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous for the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types. By making it recognizable, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

(19) As shown in FIG. 21, the hold sequence is based on the fact that at least one of the hold storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot and the hold storage information determined to be a small hit is included. Since the notification effect can be executed, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the effect.

(20) As shown in FIG. 21, since the number of the reserved storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the number of the reserved stored information determined to be the small hit are identifiable in the hold continuous notification effect, the player By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the number of reserved storage information that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

(21) When a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the V prize notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the hold continuous notification effect can be executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production when a prize is generated.

(22) As shown in [Variation example of change in the effect mode of the hold continuous notification effect], there are a plurality of cases where the total number of hold storage information which is a symbol big hit and the hold storage information which is a big hit is a plurality, and when there is a total number of hold storage information which is a small hit. When the production mode of the hold continuous notification effect is different depending on the case where there are only a plurality of hold storage information that are big hits, it is possible to change the effect mode of the hold continuous notification effect to be executed according to the hold sequence type. , The player can be made to pay attention to which effect mode the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

(23) As shown in [Modification example of change in production mode of hold continuous notification effect], when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is different for each of the first hold sequence type to the third hold sequence type. Can make the player pay attention to which effect mode the hold continuous notification effect is executed.

(24) As shown in [Modification example of limiting control of hold continuous notification effect], after executing the hold continuous notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of hold stations, the hold that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect By prohibiting the execution of the hold continuous notification effect until all the stored information is exhausted, it is restricted to newly execute the hold continuous notification effect. One can be clarified.

(Explanation of feature 33AK)
Subsequently, the feature unit 33AK will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature unit 33AK, if the second reserved memory number is accumulated when the time saving state ends, the second special symbol for the second reserved memory number accumulated even after the time saving state ends. Special figure game is executed. If the small hit game state is controlled based on the special figure game, a V prize is generated, the big hit game state is controlled again, and the time reduction state is controlled again. That is, by accumulating the second reserved memory number in the time saving state, the probability that so-called continuous chan occurs increases, and when the second reserved storage number is not accumulated in the time saving state, the amount not accumulated (for example, the maximum). Since the opportunity to execute the special symbol game of the 2nd special symbol (4 times) (the opportunity of the small hit lottery to win at about 1/7) is lost, it is extremely disadvantageous to the player compared to the case where the 2nd reserved memory number is accumulated. turn into. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an unfavorable state, the feature unit 33AK executes a winning promotion notification (notification of accumulating hold) according to the second hold storage number at that time at the time of the final time reduction change. It has become.

FIG. 35-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table in the feature unit 33AK. The main difference from the type table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and the jackpot without time reduction are provided in the symbol jackpot. In the present embodiment, as the big hit type, the big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction (first big hit), the big hit without the symbol 5R time reduction (the second big hit), the small hit (first small hit) via 11 (10) R time reduction big hit, And a big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via a small hit (second small hit) is provided. The numerical value in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 35-1, the jackpot via the small hit in the present embodiment includes the jackpot via 11 (10) R time reduction and the small hit via 6 (5) R time reduction, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. Big hits are included. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment includes a symbol 5R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 5R time-saving jackpot that are directly generated based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

The big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction (also called the first big hit) is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R). The big hit with no time reduction of symbol 5R (also called the second big hit) is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R).

In the 11 (10) R time saving big hit via the small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 10 times (10R) on condition of the V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 11 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 10 times, and the player can open the big winning opening in the same big hit as the symbol 10R time saving big hit. I feel it is a type. Via small hit 11 (10) R The small hit that triggers the time saving big hit is also called the first small hit.

6 (5) R time saving via small hit For big hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the big winning opening is the same big hit type as the symbol 5R time saving big hit. Via small hit 6 (5) R There is a short time. The small hit that triggers the big hit is also called the second small hit.

Symbol 5R with time reduction As a condition for ending the time reduction state after a big hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 5 Two conditions are set, the end condition of times. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one considers that the game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one may generate a big hit via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. There is a certain number of times.

There is a time reduction of symbol 5R The time reduction state after a big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 5 times. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described with reference to FIG. The reason is the same as that described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, and before the jackpot game state, a maximum of four can be stored in the first start winning prize. This is to ensure that even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the pending information of is started, the variable display of one time of the second special symbol, which is easy to be determined as a big hit that is advantageous for the player, can be executed. .. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

In addition, after the big hit via the small hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times, which is the end condition of the time saving state, is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times may generate a jackpot via a small hit as compared with the symbol 5R time-saving jackpot when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be raised.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 7 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of fluctuations is feasible. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In addition, after the big hit with no time reduction of the symbol 5R, it shifts to the normal state. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R time-saving big hit, via small hit 11 (10) R time-saving big hit, and via small hit 6 (5) R time-saving big hit may be expressed as time-saving big hit.

In this embodiment, the jackpot determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 35-2 (A). Therefore, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is 1/199 when the first special symbol changes. When it is determined that the first special symbol is a big hit, it is determined as the big hit type of the first big hit or the second big hit. As shown in FIG. 35-2 (B), in the case of the present embodiment, the "first jackpot" and the "second jackpot" are each selected at 50%. The jackpot symbol of the "first jackpot" is set to "7", and the jackpot symbol of the second jackpot is set to "3".

Similarly, the small hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 35-2 (A), which is used. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1 / 7.35 when the second special symbol changes. When it is determined that the second special symbol is to be a small hit, it is determined to be the big hit type of the first small hit or the second small hit. As shown in FIG. 35-2 (C), in the case of the present embodiment, the "first small hit" and the "second small hit" are each selected at 50%. The jackpot symbol of the "first small hit" is set to "1", and the jackpot symbol of the second jackpot is set to "5".

The hit type shown in FIG. 35-1 is an example, and the feature unit 33AK is set so that the first special symbol is not determined to be a small hit, but the first special symbol is predetermined. It may be set so that a small hit is determined with the probability of. Further, although the second special symbol is set so as not to be determined to be a big hit, the second special symbol may be set to be determined to be a big hit with a predetermined probability. In addition, the number of big hit rounds, the number of hit types, the end condition of the time saving state, and the like can be changed within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In this embodiment, in the variation display which is the final round of the time saving state, a time saving final variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern accompanied by super reach) having a long variation display time is selected. The fluctuation display time of the time-saving final fluctuation pattern is sufficient for the second reserved storage information to be accumulated up to the upper limit if right-handed while the fluctuation display based on the time-saving final fluctuation pattern is being executed in the time-saving state. It is preferably time. By doing so, for example, even if the time saving state ends with only one change of the second special symbol, the second reserved storage number can be accumulated, and the second reserved storage information is not sufficiently accumulated in the time saving state. , It is possible to reduce the chance of losing the opportunity to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, winning the small hit, and missing the opportunity to become the big hit via the small hit.

FIG. 35-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving final fluctuation time processing executed in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (S301). In the time saving final fluctuation time processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (33AKS001).

If the time saving flag is set (33AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the final fluctuation in the time saving state (33AKS002 to 33AKS004).

First, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the variation display of the second special symbol (33AKS002), and if it is the variation display of the second special symbol (33AKS002; Yes), the special figure 2 time reduction counter. It is determined whether or not the count value of is "1" (33AKS003). If the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (33AKS002; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter is "1" (33AKS004).

Special figure 2 When the count value of the time reduction counter is "1" (33AKS003; Yes), or when the count value of the total time reduction counter is "1" (33AKS004; Yes), the current fluctuation display is time reduction. Since it is the final fluctuation in the state, the current fluctuation pattern is determined as the time-saving final fluctuation pattern, and the setting for starting the fluctuation based on the time-saving final fluctuation pattern is made (33AKS005). After that, the time-saving final fluctuation processing is completed.

When the time reduction flag is not set (33AKS001; No), when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not "1" (33AKS003; No), or when the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "1" ( 33AKS004; No), since it is not the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the time saving final fluctuation time processing is terminated. In this case, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by a process for determining a normal fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 35-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process during fluctuation. The effect setting process during fluctuation is executed in the effect symbol variation start process (S801). In the effect setting process during fluctuation, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the time saving state is started from the current variation display (33AKS011). Whether or not the time saving state is started from the fluctuation display this time may be determined based on, for example, the reception result of the effect control command for specifying the game state.

When the time saving state is started from the current variation display (33AKS011; Yes), the setting for executing the winning promotion notification is made in the current variation display (33AKS012). The winning promotion notification in the feature unit 33AK is a notification for prompting the launch (striking) of a game ball to the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning opening 14. The winning promotion notification is also a right-handed promotion notification and a notification for prompting the accumulation of the second reserved memory number. As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at the start of the time saving state. As a result, the player can be notified of the game method (right-handed) in the time-saving state, and the player can be urged to accumulate the second reserved memory number. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning promotion notifications can be executed, and in 33AKS012, an effect pattern for executing the winning promotion notification of the first aspect is selected, and based on the effect pattern, this time. Make settings to execute the winning promotion notification in the variable display.

In this variation display, based on the received variation pattern command and display result specification command, when the time saving state is not started from the current variation display (33AKS011; No) or after the 33AKS012 process is executed. It is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect that announces / suggests that it will be a big hit or reach, and the effect mode when it is executed (33AKS013). After that, the changing effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 35-5 shows an effect mode of the winning promotion notification in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect are provided as the effect mode of the prize promotion notification. The first aspect is the effect mode in which the winning promotion notification is performed by the display on the effect display device 9, and the notification image "Aim to the right!" Is displayed on the effect display device 9. The second aspect is an effect mode in which the display on the effect display device 9, the sound output from the speaker 27, and the lighting of the lamp are used to notify the winning promotion, and the effect display device 9 is informed that "hold a hold!" The image is displayed. The third aspect is an effect mode in which the effect display device 9 displays and the winning promotion notification is performed by lighting the lamp, and the effect display device 9 displays a notification image "Hold on hold!". The strength of the winning promotion notification (strength of promotion) is 2nd mode> 3rd mode> 1st mode. In the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed by any of these production modes according to the necessity of winning promotion.

FIG. 35-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving final variation effect processing. The changing effect setting process is executed in the effect symbol changing process (S802). In the time-saving final variation effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the current variation display is the time-saving final variation (33AKS021). In 33AKS021, it may be determined whether or not the received fluctuation pattern command specifies the time saving final fluctuation pattern. If it is not the time reduction final variation (33AKS021; No), the time reduction final variation effect processing is terminated.

When the time is the final variation (33AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the winning promotion notification (33AKS022). In the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at a predetermined timing (a predetermined time after the start of the fluctuation) of the fluctuation display based on the time saving final fluctuation pattern. In 33AKS022, it may be determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the winning promotion notification from the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation and the like.

If it is the execution timing of the winning promotion notification (33AKS022; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (33AKS023). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (33AKS023; Yes), a setting is made to execute the winning promotion notification of the second aspect having the strongest winning promotion degree (33AKS024). After that, the time saving final fluctuation effect processing is completed.

If the second reserved storage number is not 0 (33AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is 3 or more (33AKS025). If the second reserved memory number is not 3 or more (33AKS025; No), that is, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or 2, the winning promotion notification of the third aspect in which the degree of promotion of winning is weaker than that of the second aspect is sent. Make settings for execution (33AKS026). After that, the time saving final fluctuation effect processing is completed.

In this way, when the second reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving final fluctuation, the winning promotion notification having a stronger winning promotion degree than when the second reserved storage number is 1 or 2 is executed. There is. By doing so, it is possible to execute the winning promotion notification according to the second reserved storage number. In particular, when the second reserved memory number is 0, the strongest winning promotion notification is executed, so that the player's sense of crisis can be aroused.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number in the time saving final fluctuation is 1 or 2, and the display result of the variation display based on the second reserved memory is a small hit in the situation where the winning promotion notification is executed, the winning promotion is promoted. The notification may not be executed. In this case, an effect of notifying / suggesting that the display result of the variable display based on the second reserved memory will be a small hit may be executed.

If the second reserved memory number is 3 or more (33AKS025; Yes), a setting for executing a specific advance notice effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot game state (advantageous state) is controlled instead of the winning promotion notification is set. Do (33AKS027). After that, the time saving final fluctuation effect processing is completed.

As described above, in the feature unit 33AK, when the second reserved memory number is less than 3 in the time saving final fluctuation, the player is urged to accumulate the second reserved memory number by executing the winning promotion notification. Can be done. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is 3 or more in the time saving final fluctuation, the notification can be prevented from becoming troublesome by executing the specific advance notice effect without executing the prize promotion notification, and the fluctuation display is delayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production by the specific advance notice production while preventing the production.

It should be noted that, instead of always executing the specific advance notice effect when the second reserved storage number is 3 or more, the specific advance notice effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. In this case, when the specific advance notice effect is not executed, the winning promotion notification may be executed or the effect may not be executed. Further, a plurality of types of effect modes of the specific notice effect may be provided, and the execution rate of the specific notice effect and the determination rate of the effect mode may be different depending on the display result and the number of second reserved storages. By doing so, the specific advance notice effect becomes various, and the effect of the specific advance notice effect can be enhanced.

If it is not the execution timing of the prize promotion notification (33AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the prize promotion neglect is being executed (33AKS028). In 33AKS028, for example, if the processing of 33AKS024 or 33AKS026 has been executed, it is determined that the winning promotion notification is being executed. If the winning promotion notification is not being executed (33AKS028; No), the time saving final variation effect processing is terminated.

If the winning promotion notification is being executed (33AKS028; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to develop into super reach in the fluctuation display based on the time saving final fluctuation pattern (33AKS029). If it is the timing to develop into super reach (33AKS029; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result of this fluctuation is a big hit (big hit fluctuation) (33AKS037). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is a jackpot fluctuation (33AKS037; Yes), the winning promotion notification is stopped and a setting is made to execute the reach effect of the super reach (33AKS038). After that, the time saving final fluctuation effect processing is completed. If it is a big hit fluctuation, it will be controlled to the big hit game state after that, and will be controlled to the time saving state again. Even in the time-saving state controlled again, if the second reserved memory number is not sufficiently accumulated, the winning promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuates, the winning promotion notification is stopped, and the reach effect for inciting the jackpot is preferentially executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the situation.

In addition, even if the jackpot fluctuates, the winning promotion notification may be continued. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving final fluctuation is selected from multiple types, if the jackpot reliability of the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving final fluctuation (reach effect) is equal to or higher than a specific value, a prize promotion notification is sent. It may be canceled and the reach effect may be executed.

If the fluctuation this time is not a jackpot fluctuation (33AKS037; No), the reach effect of the super reach is executed by wiping (small window area provided in the effect display device 9) in order to prioritize the execution of the winning promotion notification (33AKS030). ).

When it is not the timing to develop into super reach (33AKS029; No), or after the processing of 33AKS030 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is 3 or more (33AKS031). When the number of second reserved memories becomes 3 or more (33AKS031; Yes), the running prize promotion notification is terminated (33AKS032). At this time, if the reach effect of the super reach is executed by the wipe, the reach effect is switched to the full screen. After that, the time saving final fluctuation effect processing is completed.

When the number of second reserved storage remains less than 3 (33AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect (33AKS033). In AKS033, it is determined in 33AKS013 of FIG. 35-4 that the advance notice effect is executed, and it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the advance notice effect. If it is not the execution timing of the advance notice effect (33AKS033; No), the time saving final variation effect process is terminated.

When the execution timing of the advance notice effect is reached during the execution of the prize promotion notification (33AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is a low-expected advance notice effect (33AKS034). The low-expectation notice effect may be defined as one of a plurality of types of notice effects having at least a lower jackpot reliability than the highest jackpot reliability notice effect. For example, here, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is the advance notice effect having the lowest jackpot reliability.

If the advance notice effect has a low expectation (33AKS034; Yes), even if the advance notice effect is executed, it hinders the winning promotion notification and the expectation of the player cannot be improved so much. Cancel (33AKS035). After that, the time saving final fluctuation effect processing is completed.

If it is not a low-expectation notice effect (33AKS034; No), a setting is made to execute the notice effect only by voice (33AKS036). That is, even if the effect display device 9 displays the advance notice image and outputs the sound, the advance notice image is not displayed and only the sound is output. As a result, it is possible to give notice / suggest that a big hit will be made by voice while preventing the winning promotion notification from being hindered by the notice image. After that, the time saving final fluctuation effect processing is completed.

In this embodiment, when the advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the prize promotion notification, the advance notice effect is executed only by voice, but some other effect of the advance notice effect (lamp lighting). Or the movement of a movable body, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, for example, in 33AKS013, when deciding whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, it is determined whether or not the second reserved memory number and the time saving final fluctuation are performed, so that whether or not the winning promotion notification is executed is executed. In the situation where the judgment is made and the prize promotion notification is executed, it is controlled so that it is not decided to execute the notice effect with a low expectation, and even when the advance notice effect is executed, the advance notice effect by voice can be executed. It may be decided.

Further, even during the execution of the prize promotion notification, the advance notice effect may be executed in parallel. In this case, only the advance notice effect of the expected degree higher than a predetermined degree may be executed in parallel with the winning promotion notification.

FIG. 35-7 is a timing chart showing the content of the effect and the like in the final variation in time reduction. As shown in FIG. 35-7 (A), when the second reserved storage number is 0 to 2 in the time saving final fluctuation, the winning promotion notification starts at a predetermined winning promotion notification timing after the fluctuation starts. Will be done. If the second reserved memory number becomes 3 or more after the winning promotion notification is executed, the winning promotion notification ends at that point. If the prize promotion notification is not executed at the time of developing into super reach, the reach effect is executed as usual.

As shown in FIG. 35-7 (B), when the second reserved memory number does not become 3 or more after the winning promotion notification is executed, the reach effect is executed by wiping even after the development into super reach. In parallel, the prize promotion notification is executed.

As shown in FIG. 35-7 (C), when the second reserved storage number is 3 or more in the time saving final fluctuation, the specific advance notice effect is executed at the same timing as the winning promotion notification timing. For example, the specific advance notice effect is executed until it develops into super reach. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the period from the start of the fluctuation to the development of super reach from being delayed.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation related to the feature unit 33AK will be described. FIG. 35-8 shows an example of the effect operation when the winning promotion notification of the first aspect is executed. FIG. 35-8 (A) shows the effect display device 9 after the end of the big hit game state, and when the characters “Chance time rush” are displayed, it is notified that the chance time (time saving state) will be entered. Has been done. In the feature unit 33AK, the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold display area 33AK001 indicating the first hold storage number, and FIG. 35-8 (A) shows that the first hold storage number is 1. ing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35-8 (B), the winning promotion notification of the first aspect in which the winning promotion image 33AK011 "Aim at the right!" Is displayed on the effect display device 9 is executed. It should be noted that the winning promotion notification of the first aspect has a higher degree of promotion of winning than the other aspects (second aspect and third aspect) because the game status (the accumulation state of the second reserved memory number) in the time saving state is unknown. It's getting weaker. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player who understands the game method from executing the prize promotion notification more than necessary.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35-8 (C), the variable display based on the first hold storage is started. Further, in the feature unit 33AK, a right-handed image 33AK012 instructing (promoting) to hit right (aiming to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen during the time saving state. ..

In addition, for example, before or after the winning promotion notification of the first aspect, by accumulating the second reserved memory number in the time saving state, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the continuous chan occurs. It is also possible to execute an explanatory effect for explaining to the player that it becomes faster, and therefore it is significantly disadvantageous if the second reserved memory number is not accumulated in the time saving state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player understand the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 33AK, and it is possible to play the game fairly.

FIG. 35-9 shows an example of the effect operation in the time saving final variation. FIG. 35-9 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the variable display is executed and the right-handed image 33AK012 is displayed. In the feature unit 33AK, the effect display device 9 is provided with a second hold display area 33AK002 showing the second hold storage number, and FIG. 35-9 (A) shows that the second hold storage number is 2. ing. When the second hold storage number is 2 in the time saving final fluctuation, when the execution timing of the winning promotion notification is reached, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (B), the effect display device 9 "store hold!" The winning promotion image 33AK013 is displayed, and the winning promotion notification of the third aspect is executed, in which the voice "Reserve hold" is output from the speaker 27. At this time, by blinking the second hold display area 33AK002, an effect of emphasizing that the second hold storage number is not accumulated is also executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (B), the variation display is executed in a small area such as the upper left of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the winning promotion notification.

After that, when the second reserved memory number does not increase, as shown in FIGS. 35-9 (C) and 35-9 (D), the winning promotion notification is continuously executed even when the reach is established and the super reach is developed. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 35-9 (D), the reach effect of the super reach is executed by the wipe (small window area) 9S.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (A'), when the second reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving final fluctuation, the execution timing of the winning promotion notification is shown in FIG. 35-9 (B'). As shown, the effect display device 9 executes a specific advance notice effect. In FIG. 35-9 (B'), the detailed effect content of the specific advance effect is omitted by the notation of only characters, but the predetermined specific advance effect is executed by displaying the effect image or outputting the sound. Just do it. The specific notice production may be a production that announces / suggests that it will be a big hit, or it may be a production that encourages becoming a super reach. In this way, when the second reserved memory number is sufficiently accumulated and it does not become extremely disadvantageous to the player, it is preferable to execute the specific advance notice effect without executing the prize promotion notification, depending on the situation. The production can be executed.

(Modification example of feature 33AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

The production mode of the winning promotion notification shown in FIG. 35-5 is an example, and the strength of the winning promotion notification (strength of promotion) is the second mode (when the second reserved memory number is 0)> the third mode (second mode). If the number of reserved memories is 1 or 2)> 1st mode (at the start of the time saving state), the effect mode may be arbitrary. As a winning promotion notification by the display on the effect display device 9, an image of the target game area and the target winning opening (second starting winning opening 14) may be displayed. Further, as a prize promotion notification that arouses the player's sense of crisis, the time until the end of the final time reduction variation may be displayed as a countdown.

In the above embodiment, when the second reserved memory number is 3 or more in the time saving final variation, a suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) is controlled without executing the winning promotion notification. As a result, the specific advance notice production was supposed to be executed, but the suggestion effect is the effect of the boss who suggests whether or not to control it in an advantageous state (notice effect, reach effect, tempai fanning of the effect pattern, etc.). Good.

In the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at the start of the time saving state, but the winning promotion notification at the start of the time saving state may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player who understands the game method from executing unnecessary prize promotion notification.

In the present embodiment, when the reach effect is executed during the execution of the prize promotion notification, the reach effect is executed by the wipe, so that the prize promotion notification is executed with priority. The method of preferentially executing the winning promotion notification is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the winning promotion notification is executed with priority over the reach effect. The area used for the winning promotion notification in the effect display device 9 may be made larger than the reach effect, or the winning promotion notification may be prioritized with respect to the sound output and the light emission of the lamp. Even if the winning promotion notification is executed, the reach effect of the super reach as usual may be executed. For example, when the display result is a small hit, the normal super reach may be executed even if the winning promotion notification is executed. In this case, even if the second reserved memory number is small, a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) will occur, so that the player will not suffer any disadvantage. By doing so, it is possible to execute the winning promotion notification according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, the production mode of the winning promotion notification is different depending on whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or 1 or 2 in the time saving final variation, but the second reserved memory number is 2 or less. In some cases, the winning promotion notification of the same effect mode may be executed. In addition, when the second reserved memory number is 3 or more in the time saving final fluctuation, the specific advance notice effect is executed without executing the prize promotion notification, but the second reserved memory number is 1 or more. In the case of a certain arbitrary number, the specific advance notice effect may be executed without executing the prize promotion notification. In the time saving final fluctuation, the winning promotion notification may not be executed only when the second reserved storage number is the upper limit number at a predetermined timing after the start of the fluctuation (for example, the execution timing of the winning promotion notification). That is, the threshold value for making the effect different according to the second reserved storage number in the time saving final fluctuation may be arbitrary.

The feature unit 33AK may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine provided with a drum-type variable display device. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 9 capable of variable display (also referred to as variable display) of the effect symbol as the identification information is provided, but the times when a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) are attached to the surface. A variable display device having a plurality of cylinders (hereinafter, also referred to as "reels") and having a plurality of display areas in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by rotating a plurality of cylinders is provided. May be good. Then, instead of the variable display of the effect symbol, the variable display device may rotate the rotating cylinder to execute the variable display of the symbol, and display whether or not the display result is a big hit.

In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include both an effect display device 9 and a variable display device. For example, the variable display device may be provided in the central portion of the game area, and the effect display device 9 may be provided in the peripheral portion (for example, the upper portion) of the variable display device. Then, the effect display device 9 may execute various effects and displays related to the game without executing the variable display of the effect symbol. For example, the winning promotion notification may be executed by the effect display device 9, and the specific advance notice effect (suggestion effect) may be executed by the variable display device. When the second reserved storage number is not sufficiently accumulated, such as when the second reserved storage number is less than 3 in the time saving final fluctuation, the variable display device is prevented from executing the specific advance notice effect, and the effect display device 9 In, the prize promotion notification may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the specific advance notice effect in the variable display device and prevent the winning promotion notification from being overlooked.

Regarding this embodiment, a game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a variable display result of a special symbol or a production symbol, and a variable winning ball device (so-called) provided in the game area. A gaming machine that is combined with a gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in the accessory). Although (a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer) has been described, the feature portion 33AK may be applied to the type 2 gaming machine.

(Explanation of means related to feature 33AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 33AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs variable display, and
A second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that performs variable display, and
A hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that stores information related to variable display in the second variable display means as hold information, and
After the end of the advantageous state, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the processing of the special state control means (for example, S164 to S170) that can control the special state (for example, the time saving state) in which the hold information is more easily stored than the normal state CPU 56) to execute and
An effect control means (for example, a specific advance notice effect) that can execute a promotion notification (for example, a winning promotion notification) that prompts the storage of the reserved information and a suggestion effect (for example, a specific advance notice effect) that suggests whether or not the holding information is controlled to the advantageous state. For example, a CPU 101) for effect control that executes a time-saving final variation effect process is provided.
In the special state, when the reserved information is stored up to the upper limit number, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the upper limit number is not stored (for example, in the variable display of the second special symbol). Small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7),
The effect control means
When the special state final variable display, which is the variable display of the predetermined number of times, is executed by the first number (for example, 0 to 2) in which the number of the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means is less than the upper limit number. The promotion notification can be executed,
When the special state final variable display is executed by a second number (for example, 3 or more) in which the number of the holding information stored in the holding storage means is larger than the first number, the promotion notification is not executed. In addition, the suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate notification according to the situation.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
When controlled to the special state, the effect control means can execute the promotion notification (for example, the winning promotion notification of the first aspect) in a mode different from the promotion notification in the final variable display of the special state. It may be.
According to such a configuration, the promotion notification can be suitably executed, and the promotion notification in the special state final variable display can be focused on.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The effect control means can execute the reach effect after the specific timing of the special state final variable display, and when the number of the pending information is the first number even after the specific timing, the reach effect. The promotion notification may be preferentially executed (for example, the reach effect is executed by the wipe 9S).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
0 is included as the first number,
The effect control means makes the mode of the promotion notification different depending on whether the number of the reserved information is 0 or the other first number (for example, the processing of 33AKS023 to 33AKS026 is executed). You may.
According to such a configuration, the promotion notification can be preferably executed.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
When it is determined to execute the suggestion effect having a specific expectation during the execution of the promotion notification, the effect control means executes at least a part of the effect of the suggestion effect (for example, the process of 33AKS030 is executed). You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the suggestion effect of the specific expectation degree is being executed.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The effect control means executes the suggestion effect in the first effect device (for example, a drum-type variable display device), and sends the promotion notification to a second effect device (for example, an effect display device 9) different from the first effect device. It may be executed in.
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the second effect device in which the promotion notification is executed.

(Explanation of feature 73AK)
Subsequently, the feature unit 73AK will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature unit 73AK, when the second hold storage number, which is the number of the second hold information (second hold storage, second hold storage information), is accumulated at the end of the time saving state, , The special symbol game (variable display) of the second special symbol is executed for the number of second reserved memories accumulated even after the end of the time saving state. If the small hit game state is controlled based on the special figure game, a V prize is generated, the big hit game state is controlled again, and the time reduction state is controlled again. That is, by accumulating the second reserved memory number in the time saving state, the probability that so-called continuous chan occurs increases, and when the second reserved storage number is not accumulated in the time saving state, the amount not accumulated (for example, the maximum). Since you lose the opportunity to execute the special symbol game of the 2nd special symbol (4 times) (the opportunity of the small hit lottery to win at about 1/7 as described later), the game is much more than when the 2nd reserved memory number is accumulated. It will be disadvantageous to the person. Therefore, the value of one of the second reserved storage numbers is high.

During the final fluctuation in the time saving state (for example, just before the end of the fluctuation), when the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 15 and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed, and the display result of the normal symbol is a hit, the time is shortened. There is a possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 will be opened during the change of the second special symbol after the end of the state. Then, the game ball may win a prize in the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14) in the open state, and the second reserved memory number may increase. In such a case, after the end of the time saving state, the special symbol game of the second special symbol is executed beyond the upper limit of the second reserved storage number of four times. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 73AK, the value of one of the second reserved storage numbers is high. Therefore, if the special figure game of the second special symbol is executed beyond the upper limit of the second reserved memory number after the end of the time saving state, the small hit occurrence probability (consecutive chan probability) increases, so that the player is more than expected. It becomes advantageous to the game, and the fairness of the game cannot be guaranteed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 73AK, the time saving state (high base control) is terminated when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit number during the final fluctuation in the time saving state. There is. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from opening after the end of the time saving state and increasing the number of second reserved storage, and after the end of the time saving state, the upper limit of the number of second reserved storage is exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special figure game of the second special symbol from being executed. And the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

FIG. 36-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table in the feature unit 73AK. The main differences from the type table shown in FIG. 2 are the number of rounds, the provision of a jackpot without time reduction in the symbol jackpot, and the occurrence of a small hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the big hit types are: symbol 5R time-saving big hit (first big hit), symbol 5R time-saving no big hit (second big hit), small hit (first small hit) via 11 (10) R time-saving big hit, and There is a 6 (5) R time reduction via a small hit (second small hit) and a large hit is provided. The numerical value in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. Further, as a small hit type, a first small hit, a second small hit, and a third small hit are provided.

In this embodiment, the jackpot determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 36-2 (A). Therefore, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is 1/199 when the first special symbol and the second special symbol change. When it is determined to be a big hit, it is determined to be the big hit type of the first big hit or the second big hit. As shown in FIG. 36-2 (B), in the case of this embodiment, the "first jackpot" and the "second jackpot" are each selected at 50%. The jackpot symbol of the "first jackpot" is set to "7", and the jackpot symbol of the second jackpot is set to "3".

Similarly, the small hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 36-2 (A), which is used. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1/30 when the first special symbol changes, and 1 / 7.35 when the second special symbol changes. When it is determined that the second special symbol is to be a small hit, it is determined to be the small hit type of the first small hit or the second small hit. As shown in FIG. 36-2 (C), in the case of this embodiment, the "first small hit" and the "second small hit" are selected at 50% each when the second special symbol fluctuates. The small hit symbol of the "first small hit" is set to "1", and the small hit symbol of the second big hit is set to "5". When it is determined that the first special symbol is to be a small hit, it is determined to be the small hit type of the third small hit. As shown in FIG. 36-2 (D), in the case of this embodiment, the "third small hit" is selected at 100% when the first special symbol fluctuates. The small hit symbol of the "third small hit" is set to "9".

As shown in FIG. 36-1, the big hit via small hit in this embodiment has 11 (10) R time reduction via small hit and 6 (5) R time reduction via small hit, which have different numbers of rounds in the big hit. Big hits are included. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in this embodiment includes a symbol 5R jackpot with a time reduction and a symbol 5R jackpot without a time reduction that are directly generated based on the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction (also called the first big hit) and the big hit without the symbol 5R time reduction (also called the second big hit) are big hits in which the big prize opening is opened 5 times (5R: 29 seconds in each round).

11 (10) R time saving big hit via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is 10 times (10R: each round) on condition of V winning. 29 seconds) It is a big hit that is opened, and the winning device for 11 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 10 times, and the player has a 10R time reduction for the opening of the big winning opening. I feel that it is the same type of jackpot as the jackpot. Via small hit 11 (10) R The small hit that triggers the time saving big hit is also called the first small hit.

Via small hit 6 (5) R time reduction For big hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is 5 times (5R: each round 29) on condition of V winning. Seconds) It is a big hit that is opened. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the big winning opening is the same big hit type as the symbol 5R time saving big hit. Via small hit 6 (5) R There is a short time. The small hit that triggers the big hit is also called the second small hit. The first small hit and the second small hit are generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the third small hit generated based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times) in the same manner as the first small hit and the second small hit. , It is a small hit that V prize does not occur.

FIG. 36-3 is a timing chart showing an opening mode of the V winning region in a small hit. When the first small hit or the second small hit is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 36-3 (A), the V determination winning device 87 is (0.1 second ×). When it is opened (10 times), the V winning area 870 is also opened until one game ball wins the V winning area 870. As a result, V winning is possible in the small hit game state based on the first small hit and the second small hit. On the other hand, when the third small hit is obtained based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the V-judgment winning device 87 (0.1 seconds ×) as shown in FIG. 36-3 (B). When it is opened (10 times), the V winning area 870 is closed, and the V winning area 870 is opened t hours after the opening of the V determination winning device 87 is completed. Here, since t is a time longer than the time from the V determination winning device 87 (operating port) to the arrival of the game ball in the V winning area 870, V is V in the small hit gaming state based on the third small hit. It is not possible to win a prize.

As described above, in this embodiment, the small hit may be won based on the variable display of the first special symbol, but the small hit type has little substantial merit for the player. .. In this way, by providing a small hit type that has little substantial merit for the player, it is possible to prevent the small hit from being excessively advantageous to the player.

Symbol 5R with time reduction As a condition for ending the time reduction state after a big hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 5 Two conditions are set, the end condition of times. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one considers that the game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one may generate a big hit via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. There is a certain number of times.

There is a time reduction of symbol 5R The time reduction state after a big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 5 times. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described with reference to FIG. The reason is the same as that described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, and before the jackpot game state, a maximum of four can be stored in the first start winning prize. This is to ensure that even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the pending information of is started, the variable display of one time of the second special symbol, which is easy to be determined as a big hit that is advantageous for the player, can be executed. .. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

In addition, after the big hit via the small hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times, which is the end condition of the time saving state, is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times may generate a jackpot via a small hit as compared with the symbol 5R time-saving jackpot when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be raised.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 7 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of fluctuations is feasible. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

Further, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the time saving state, an ending condition is also set in which the number of small hits generated based on the variation display of the second special symbol is two times. As the small hits based on the variation display of the second special symbol, as described above, the first small hit that is in the big hit game state of 10 rounds when the V prize is won, and the second small hit that is the big hit game state of the actual 5 rounds when the V prize is won Hit and are provided. The type of small hit can be confirmed by the small hit symbol, but in the short time state, if the second small hit is reached, V is intentionally aimed at becoming the first small hit, which is a more advantageous big hit game state. You can choose a game method such as avoiding winning. In order to make it difficult to select such a game method, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the time saving state, an ending condition that the number of small hits based on the variation display of the second special symbol is set to 2 is also set. .. Since the small hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol does not become a big hit via the small hit, it is not counted as the number of small hits in the time-saving state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending due to the occurrence of a small hit that is not advantageous to the player. The number of small hits that are the end condition of the time saving state is not limited to two, and may be one or three times or more (less than the number of fluctuations that is the end condition of the time saving state). In addition, if there is no big hit via a small hit such as the third small hit and a small hit with little merit for the player is not provided, the number of occurrences of all small hits is counted, and the time is shortened according to the number of times. You just have to end the state.

In addition, after the big hit with no time reduction of the symbol 5R, it shifts to the normal state. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R time-saving big hit, via small hit 11 (10) R time-saving big hit, and via small hit 6 (5) R time-saving big hit may be expressed as time-saving big hit.

The hit type shown in FIG. 36-1 is an example, and the feature unit 73AK is set so that the first special symbol is determined to be a small hit, but the first special symbol is set to be a small hit. It may be set so that it is not judged as a small hit. Further, although the second special symbol is set so as to be determined to be a big hit, the second special symbol may be set so as not to be determined to be a big hit. In addition, the number of big hit rounds, the number of hit types, the end condition of the time saving state, and the like can be changed within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Subsequently, the operation in the feature unit 73AK will be described. FIG. 36-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start processing that is executed once at the fluctuation start. The change start process may be executed, for example, in the special symbol change process (S303). The change start processing includes a process of subtracting and updating the time reduction counter at the start of fluctuation and managing a time reduction flag.

In the fluctuation start processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 73AKS001). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS001; No), the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

If the time reduction flag is set (step 73AKS001; Yes), the total time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (step 73AKS002).

The total time reduction counter is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the time reduction state is controlled after the jackpot game is completed. The total time reduction counter is set to 5 times when it is controlled to the time reduction state after the 5R symbol time reduction big hit, and to 11 times when it is controlled to the time reduction state after the time reduction big hit via the small hit. , Step 73AKS002 subtracts and updates each time the variation display is executed.

Next, based on confirming whether or not the special symbol pointer is the data indicating the "second", it is determined whether or not it is the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (step 73S003). When it is the start of the variation display of the second special symbol (step 73AKS003; Yes), the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (step 73AKS004).

The special figure 2 time reduction counter is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when the time reduction state is controlled after the jackpot game is completed. Special figure 2 The time reduction counter is set to 1 time when it is controlled to the time reduction state after the 5R symbol time reduction big hit in the big hit end processing, and to 7 times when it is controlled to the time reduction state after the time reduction big hit via the small hit. It is set, and by step 73AKS004, it is subtracted and updated every time the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter has become "0" (step 73AKS005). When the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not "0" (step 73AKS005; No), or when the variation display of the first special symbol is started (step 73AKS003; No), the total number of time reductions It is determined whether or not the count value of the counter has become "0" (step 73AKS006). If the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0" (step 73AKS006; No), the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Special figure 2 When the count value of the time reduction counter becomes "0" (step 73AKS005; Yes), or when the count value of the total time reduction counter becomes "0" (step 73AKS006; Yes), the time reduction flag Is reset (step 73AKS007) and the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS008). After that, the processing at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

In this embodiment, the time reduction counter is subtracted and updated at the start of the fluctuation, and the time reduction flag is reset at the start of the fluctuation in the final fluctuation (time reduction final fluctuation) in the time reduction state. However, the time saving state (high base control) does not end immediately when the time saving flag is reset, and the time saving extension flag is set until the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value. Then, while the time saving extension flag is set, the time saving state (high base control) continues. As described above, in this embodiment, since the time saving flag is reset at a fixed timing (at the time of the time saving final fluctuation), the control for resetting the time saving flag becomes easy, and the behavior can be expected to be stable. During the final time reduction fluctuation, the time reduction extension flag is used to determine and manage the time reduction state.

The time saving flag and the time saving extension flag are referred to in the normal symbol process processing, and when any of them is on, high base control (control to increase the probability that the stopped symbol of the normal symbol becomes a hit symbol, etc.) in the normal symbol process processing, etc. ) Is executed. When the time saving flag and the time saving extension flag are turned off, the high base control in the normal symbol process processing ends, and the time saving state ends.

FIG. 36-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving end determination process. The time saving end determination process is a process for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied during the fluctuation and ending the time saving state when the end condition is satisfied, and is repeated in the special symbol changing processing (S303). Will be executed.

In the time saving end determination process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS011). If the time saving extension flag is not set (step 73AKS011; No), the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

If the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS011; Yes), whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage number for counting the second reserved storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is determined (step 73AKS012). If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (step 73AKS012; No), the time saving end determination process is terminated.

When the second hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in the time saving final fluctuation in which the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS012; Yes), the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the time saving extension flag is reset (step 73AKS013). , The process for transmitting the normal state specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS014), and the time saving end determination process is terminated.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol stop process (FIG. 13), a process of subtracting and updating the time reduction counter and resetting the time reduction flag is included. In the feature unit 73AK, the time reduction counter is subtracted and updated by the processing shown in FIGS. 36-4 and 36-5, and the processing for managing the time reduction flag and the time reduction extension flag is executed. Processing is not executed. Further, in the feature unit 73AK, since the number of small hits in the time saving state is also an end condition of the time saving state, a process for ending the time saving state based on the number of small hits is also executed in the special symbol stop processing. ..

FIG. 36-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing related to the feature unit 73AK. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 36-6, the same process as the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 13 is given the same step number and the description thereof will be omitted. In the special symbol stop processing related to the feature unit 73AK, when the jackpot flag is set (step S133; Yes), the CPU 56 resets the time saving flag or the time saving extension flag when the time saving flag or the time saving extension flag is set (step AKS030). ).

When the jackpot flag is not set (step S133; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS027). If the time saving extension flag is not set (step 73AKS027; No), the process proceeds to step S139. If the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS027; Yes), the display result is lost or small hit at the end of the time saving final fluctuation, so the time saving extension flag is reset (step 73AKS028), and the normal state specification command is executed. The process for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS029), and the process proceeds to step S139.

When the small hit flag is set in step S139 (step S139; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS021).

If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the third small hit (step 73AKS022). If the time reduction flag is not set (step 73AKS021; No), or if the small hit type is the third small hit (step 73AKS022; Yes), the process proceeds to step S140.

When the small hit type is not the third small hit (step 73AKS022; No), that is, when the small hit type is the first small hit or the second small hit generated based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the number of small hits. The counter is updated by subtracting -1 (step 73AKS023). The small hit count counter is a counter for counting the number of times of the first small hit or the second small hit in the time saving state, and when controlled in the time saving state, the initial value is "2" (of the second special symbol). A value corresponding to the end condition that the number of small hits generated based on the fluctuation display is 2 times) is set.

After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit count counter becomes "0" (step 73AKS024), and when the small hit count counter becomes "0" (step 73AKS024; Yes), the time saving flag is reset (step 73AKS025). ), The process for transmitting the normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS026), and the process proceeds to step S140. If the small hit count counter is not "0" (step 73AKS024; No), the process proceeds to step S140.

If the small hit flag is not set (step S139; No), the process proceeds to step S152.

In the feature unit 73AK, by executing such a special symbol stop process, control is performed to end the time saving state based on the number of small hits, or when the second reserved storage number is not the upper limit at the end of the time saving final fluctuation. However, it is possible to execute control to end the time saving state.

In particular, in the time saving final fluctuation, even if the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied because the second reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit, the time saving extension flag is turned off at the end of the time saving final fluctuation, so that the time saving state is surely set. It can be terminated and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

FIG. 36-7 shows an example of the effect operation in the time saving final variation of the feature unit 73AK. FIG. 36-7 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the variable display is executed and the right-handed image 73AK012 is displayed. The effect display device 9 is provided with a second hold display area 73AK002 showing the second hold storage number, and FIG. 36-7 (A) shows that the second hold storage number is 2. When the second reserved storage number is 2 (when it is not the upper limit number) in the time saving final fluctuation, for example, when the execution timing of the winning promotion notification is reached, the effect display device 9 is displayed as shown in FIG. 36-7 (B). The winning promotion image 73AK013 "Accumulate hold!" Is displayed, and the winning promotion notification that blinks the second hold display area 73AK002 is executed. Then, when the second reserved storage number reaches 4, which is the upper limit number, for example, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C), it is called "charge completion" indicating that the second reserved storage number has been accumulated in the effect display device 9. The character image 73AK014 is displayed. At this time, the time saving state (high base control) is also terminated. Then, for example, after the reach is executed, the time saving final variation ends as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D). In addition, in order to facilitate the accumulation of the reserved information of the second special symbol, the time-saving final variation may select or facilitate the selection of a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, a variation pattern accompanied by reach). Further, the time saving final variation may be made difficult so that the variable winning ball device 15 is not opened during the variation after the end of the time saving state by lengthening the stop time of the symbol and the interval until the time variation.

After that, after the end of the time saving state, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the accumulated second reserved memory is executed. Here, after the end of the time saving state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed four times by the upper limit of the number of second reserved storages. Then, when all of them are lost, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (E), the number of consecutive chans after the transition to the time saving state, the total number of balls won, etc. are displayed, and the advantageous state for the player is completed. Is shown. Even after the end of the time saving state, if a small hit occurs at about 1/7, the right-handed image is continuously displayed, so that the right-handed image 73AK015 with only the arrow is displayed. This makes it possible to show the player an appropriate game method.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (F), the arrow image 73AK016 notifying the player to play the game by left-handed is displayed.

It should be noted that the winning promotion notification shown in FIG. 36-7, the display indicating that the second reserved memory number has been accumulated, the right-handed display, the number of consecutive chans, the total number of balls won, etc. are examples, and the time reduction final variation. It suffices to execute the control that the time saving state ends when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit number, and the effect mode during the variable display may be arbitrary.

FIG. 36-8 is a timing chart until the end of the time saving state. The timings t1 to t4 in FIG. 36-8 correspond to the timings t1 to t4 in FIG. 36-7. As shown in FIG. 36-8, at the timing t1 which is the start timing of the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving flag is reset to off and the time saving extension flag is set to on. After that, at the timing t2, when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit number, the time saving extension flag is reset to off, and the time saving state (high base control) ends. Then, after the time saving final variation is completed at the timing t3, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second reserved storage number is executed.

Hall management from the main board (game control board) 31 by the information output process in step S29 during the time saving state and while the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the number of second reserved storages accumulated after the time saving is executed. A time-saving and medium-time signal is output to the outside of a game machine such as a computer. Further, at this time, the right-handed LED (right-handed lamp) provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 and indicating that the player is in a right-handed state is turned on. When the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the number of the second reserved storage ends at the timing t4, the time saving medium signal and the right-handed LED are turned off. By doing so, it is possible to preferably grasp the number of consecutive chans and the number of balls to be ejected by an external device. In addition, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate game method. The timing for externally outputting the time-saving medium signal is a right-handed command output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (a command indicating that the time-saving state is in effect, or during the pending digestion of the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends. It may be synchronized with the output timing of the command) indicating that there is.

(Modification example of feature portion 73AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the time saving flag is reset at the start of the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving extension flag is set, and the time saving extension flag is used to manage whether or not the time saving state is in the time saving final fluctuation. Not limited to this, it is possible to manage whether or not the time saving state is achieved only by the time saving flag without providing the time saving extension flag. In this case, the time saving flag is reset when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied in the time saving final fluctuation, and the time saving state is ended.

FIG. 36-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving end determination process in the modified example in which the time saving extension flag is not provided. In the time saving end determination process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS101). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS101; No), the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the final variation in the time saving state (73AKS102 to 73AKS104).

First, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the variation display of the second special symbol (73AKS102), and if it is the variation display of the second special symbol (73AKS102; Yes), the special figure 2 time reduction counter. It is determined whether or not the count value of is "1" (73AKS103). If the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (73AKS103; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter is "1" (73AKS104).

Special figure 2 When the count value of the time reduction counter is "1" (73AKS103; Yes), or when the count value of the total time reduction counter is "1" (73AKS104; Yes), the fluctuation display this time is time reduction. Since it is the final fluctuation in the state, whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 4). Whether or not) is determined (step 73AKS105). If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (step 73AKS105; No), the time saving end determination process is terminated.

When the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in the time saving final fluctuation (step 73AKS105; Yes), the time saving state end condition is satisfied, the time saving flag is reset (step 73AKS106), and the normal state specification command is produced and controlled. The process for transmitting to the microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS107), and the time saving end determination process is completed.

In this modified example, the change start process shown in FIG. 36-4 is not executed in step S303, and in step S304, the process of steps 73AKS021 to 73AKS026 is added to the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 13 (second special). A special symbol stop process is executed with the addition of a process to end the time saving state according to the number of small hits based on the symbol variation display).

According to this modification, it is not necessary to provide a new flag such as the time saving extension flag, and the time saving state can be terminated when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit number in the time saving final fluctuation.

In the above embodiment, in the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving state (high base control) is terminated when the second holding storage number reaches the upper limit number, but in the time saving final fluctuation, the second holding storage number is terminated. May end the time saving state based on a predetermined number (for example, 3 or the like) less than the upper limit. Further, instead of immediately ending the time saving state when the second reserved storage number becomes a predetermined number less than the upper limit number in the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving state may be terminated after the predetermined grace time has elapsed. Further, the time saving state may be terminated based on the fact that the number of second reserved storages increased in the time saving final fluctuation becomes a specific number (for example, 2 or the like).

Further, in the time saving final fluctuation, even if the second reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit number, the time saving state may be terminated at a timing before a predetermined period of the fluctuation end.

In the final time saving fluctuation, the control for ending the time saving state based on the upper limit number (predetermined number) of the second reserved storage number is not limited to the control of the above-described embodiment and the modified example, and is an arbitrary control. May be realized by.

Further, in the time saving final fluctuation, the end condition of the time saving state may be different depending on whether or not there is an advantageous display result (small hit or big hit) by pre-reading the second reserved storage information. .. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, if there is no display result advantageous to the second holding storage information, the time saving state is terminated based on the second holding storage number reaching the upper limit number, and the second holding storage information If there is a display result that is advantageous to the above, the time saving state may be terminated based on the fact that the second reserved storage number becomes a predetermined number less than the upper limit number. By doing so, it is possible to execute high-base control according to the game situation.

Based on the fact that the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory), the non-electric accessory is opened, and the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The invention according to the feature portion 73AK may be applied to the gaming machine. When the non-electric accessory is opened, it will be in the open state until a specified number (for example, 2) of game balls are won. In such a game machine, when the time saving state (high base control) is terminated at the end timing of the time saving final fluctuation, the non-electric accessory (second starting winning opening) is set to the upper limit of the second reserved storage number in the time saving final fluctuation. ) Is released, the time saving state is terminated, and after the time saving state is completed, the non-electric accessory (No. 1) that is released after the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the accumulated second reserved memory is executed. It is possible to win a specified number of game balls in the 2 starting winning opening). Therefore, even in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with such a non-electric accessory, a variable winning ball device can be obtained by ending the time saving state (high base control) at the timing when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit due to the time saving final fluctuation. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls that win the (ordinary electric accessory), and it is difficult to end the time saving state with the non-electric accessory (second start winning opening) open while limiting the number of second reserved memories. Can be.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 73AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 73AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to 73AK) capable of performing variable display by a first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) and a second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b). ) And
When the variable display in the second variable display means is executed, it is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the variable display in the first variable display means is executed (for example, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
A variable winning device (for example, a variable winning device) that changes from a closed state to an open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state, based on the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol being a predetermined result (for example, the normal symbol hits). Variable winning ball device 15) and
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable winning device, the hold storage means (for example, the second hold storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the second variable display means as the second hold information.
A special state control means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170) that can control the variable winning device to a special state (for example, a time saving state or a high base state) in which the variable winning device is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal state.
A special state ending means (for example, CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS013, step 73AKS028, and step 73AKS106) for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state is provided.
The special state termination means is provided on the condition that the number of the second hold information stored by the hold storage means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 which is the upper limit number) in the final variable display in the special state. , The special state can be terminated (for example, CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS012, step 73AKS013, step 73AKS105, and step 73AKS106).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means which is advantageous more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
When the number of the second reserved information stored by the reserved storage means does not reach the predetermined number in the final variable display in the special state, the special state ending means is said to have the special state at the end of the variable display. The state may be terminated (for example, CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS028 and step S149).
With such a configuration, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
When the special state is controlled, the first flag (for example, the time saving flag) is turned on, and in the final variable display in the special state, the first flag is turned off at the start of the variable display and the second flag is turned on. A flag management means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS012 and step 73AKS013) that turns on the (for example, the time saving extension flag) and turns off the second flag when a predetermined condition is satisfied is provided.
The special state termination means may terminate the special state based on the fact that the second flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means which is advantageous more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (2) above
Flag management in which the first flag (for example, the time saving flag) is turned on when controlled to the special state, and the first flag is turned off when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the final variable display in the special state. The means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS105 and step 73AKS106) is provided.
The special state termination means may terminate the special state based on the fact that the first flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means which is advantageous more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display in the second variable display means, it is better when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display in the first variable display means. It tends to be advantageous to the player (eg, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
The special state termination means
The number of variable displays in the special state is counted, and when the number of variable displays in the special state becomes the first number, the special state can be terminated (for example, the processing of step 73AKS007, step 73AKS028, and step S149). Execute) with
The number of times of the small hit gaming state in the special state is counted, and when the number of times of the small hit gaming state in the special state becomes the second number, the special state can be terminated (for example, the process of step 73AKS025). To execute),
As the number of variable displays in the special state, the number of variable displays in the first variable display means and the second variable display means is counted (for example, the processes of step 73AKS002 and step S143 are executed).
As the number of times of the small hit gaming state in the special state, only the number of times of the small hit gaming state based on the variable display in the second variable display means is counted, and the small hit game state based on the variable display in the first variable display means is counted. The winning game state may not be counted (for example, the processing of step 73AKS022 and step 73AKS023 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control to a special state.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
An external signal transmitting means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the process of S29) for transmitting a signal (for example, a time saving medium signal) indicating that the special state is to the outside is provided.
The external signal transmitting means may be capable of transmitting a signal indicating that the special state is in the special state for a predetermined period of time even after the end of the special state (for example, FIG. 36-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible for an external device to preferably recognize a series of advantageous states.

[Other variants]
Next, other modification examples and feature points are listed below.

(1) In the above-described embodiment, various selection decisions by lottery for executing the effect pattern of the round number suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the variation display that becomes the small hit, and the small hit game state You may execute it when it becomes.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, as an effect suggesting the number of rounds, an example is shown in which the effect mode of the V winning aura image 95 is changed for each entry of the game ball according to a predetermined effect pattern. However, not limited to this, it is determined by lottery whether or not to change the production mode (for example, color) of the V winning aura image 95 for each entry detection of the game ball, and based on the lottery result, the V winning aura image The production mode of 95 may be changed. In that case, the determination of whether or not to change the color and the selection determination of the color to be changed may be executed for each entry detection of the game ball, and the color change is always made for each entry detection of the game ball. However, the selection of the color to be changed may be determined.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which when the V-winning aura image 95 turns rainbow-colored in the round number suggestion effect, it is confirmed that the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V winning aura image 95 may be produced in rainbow colors when the 16 (15) R time saving jackpot and the holding storage information to be the holding sequence exist. Further, when the 5 (4) R time saving jackpot and the holding storage information to be the holding sequence exist, the V winning aura image 95 may be produced to be rainbow-colored.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which an effect in which the color of the V-winning aura image 95 can be changed is executed in the round number suggestion effect as a predetermined effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the round number suggestion effect, an effect in which the V winning image 94 changes from a “v” character to a “W” character may be executed. In that case, the color of the V-winning aura image 95 may be changed in the same manner as described above.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state described as the advantageous state is typically an example of the jackpot gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened a plurality of times.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, as the round suggestion effect, an effect of changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 accompanying the V-winning image 94 is shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V-winning image 94 is not limited to this. A V-winning aura image may be displayed as a non-accompanying image (for example, an aura-shaped effect image may be displayed at a position away from the V-winning image 94), and the color may be changed. Further, whether or not to execute the effect of changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 accompanying the V-winning image 94 is determined by a predetermined lottery, and may not be executed. ..

(7) In the above-described embodiment, as the hold ream notification, an example is shown in which the total of the number of hold reams for the big hit of the symbol and the number of reheld reams for the small hit can be specified, such as "+3 BONUS". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display may be made so that the number of reserved stations for the big hit of the symbol and the number of reserved stations for the small hit can be individually specified.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, as an effect pattern when executing the round number suggestion effect, the effect data when the number of game balls entering the V-judgment winning device 87 exceeds 10 is not provided. However, it is also possible to provide effect data when the number of game balls entering the V-determination winning device 87 exceeds 10. For example, if the number of game balls entering the V-determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, the color may be the same as the 10th color. In this way, even when the number of game balls entering the V-determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, the round number suggestion effect can be executed without causing a sense of discomfort.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the contents of the second reserved storage information existing when the big hit game state occurs are pre-read, and the reserved storage information that becomes the "symbol big hit" and the reserved storage information that becomes the "small hit". An example of executing the hold continuous notification effect when there is any of the above is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is hold storage information that is a “small hit”. The hold continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is hold storage information that becomes a “symbol jackpot”.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, there is a case where there is a hold storage information that becomes a "symbol big hit" and a hold storage information that becomes a "small hit" in the second hold storage information that exists when the big hit game state occurs. An example of executing a hold continuous notification effect of the same effect mode is shown for each of the cases where there is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect of different production modes may be executed depending on whether there is hold storage information that is a “symbol big hit” or there is hold storage information that is a “small hit”.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the same is true regardless of the total number of "symbol jackpots" and "small hits" in the second reserved storage information existing when the jackpot gaming state occurs. The hold continuous notification effect of the effect mode may be executed, or the hold continuous notification effect of different effect modes may be executed according to the total number.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, there are cases where there is only "symbol big hit", cases where there is only "small hit", and cases where there is only "small hit" in the second reserved storage information that exists when the big hit game state occurs, and "symbol big hit". And when there are both small hits ”, the hold continuous notification effect of the same effect mode may be executed, and depending on these cases, the hold continuous notification effect of different types of effect modes may be executed.

(13) The look-ahead of the second hold storage information for executing the hold continuous notification effect may be executed at the start of the variable display that becomes a small hit or a big hit, or may be executed during the small hit game state. It may be executed during the jackpot game state.

(14) The V-lamp effect executed as the above-mentioned hold sequence notification effect does not have to be an effect capable of notifying the number of hold stations, and may be an effect capable of notifying the number of hold stations. When the number of reserved stations is to be notified, the relationship between the number of reserved stations and the emission color of the lamp is determined in advance in the V lamp effect, and the number of reserved stations is determined by the lamp emission color based on the relationship. It may be possible to notify.

(15) Regarding "big hit via small hit", instead of selecting and determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a small hit, when a V prize occurs, multiple control patterns such as the number of rounds of the big hit are used. You may choose from different types of control patterns.

(16) The arrangement of structures such as the variable winning ball device 15, the V-judgment winning device 87, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 shown in the above-described embodiment is an example, and different arrangements such as the following are used. It may be adopted. For example, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 may be provided in the right game area. Further, a V winning area is provided inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 combines a variable winning ball device for big hits and a variable winning ball device for small hits into one variable winning ball. The device may also be used.

(17) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball wins in the V winning area of the V-judgment winning device 87, a jackpot gaming state is set and only the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened. In the big hit game state, the V determination winning device 87 may also be opened in a predetermined opening mode, or only the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode. ..

(18) In the above-described embodiment, when the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the V determination winning device 87 is always opened. Not limited to this, when a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is determined based on a specific lottery whether or not to open the open state, and the lottery result to be in the open state. When it becomes, the V determination winning device 87 may be opened.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state when the game ball wins in the V winning area in the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. By controlling the jackpot game state in which the same operation as in the game state is executed, the operation in such a game state may be executed. For example, it is possible to execute a jackpot game control of an opening pattern such that the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the first round and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. When it is determined by the jackpot determination to execute such a jackpot game control, such a jackpot game state is started, and the V determination winning device 87 is opened as the control of the first round of the jackpot game state. By letting the game appear as a small hit game state, when the game ball wins a V in the V winning area 870 in the first round, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened by continuing the big hit game state in the second round. The subsequent round control is executed to make it appear as a big hit game state. On the other hand, in the first round of the jackpot gaming state, when the game ball does not win the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87, the jackpot gaming state is not continued after the second round, but in the first round. Execute control to terminate.

(20) The advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include various advantageous states such as a jackpot game state, a time saving state, and a high base state. In a gaming machine in which the jackpot determination probability can be controlled from a low probability state to a high probability state (probability variation state), the high probability state is also included in the advantageous state. In this embodiment, as a more specific advantageous state, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the jackpot gaming state.

(21) The specific effect is to increase the number of reach lines (may be a decrease display) according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved storage information), but the following effect is performed. It may be. For example, a predetermined icon image (for example, a star-shaped image in which a character reminiscent of a player's advantageous state, "RUSH", is shown in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved storage information)). The number may be displayed as an increase (or a decrease may be displayed). In addition, the number of predetermined character images (for example, special character images that are not displayed in other effects) is increased (or decreased) in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the second reserved storage information). There may be. Further, a numerical image counting down from the upper limit value (4) of the second reserved storage information may be displayed according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of the second reserved storage information), and the current second reserved storage information may be displayed. A numerical image that counts up from the number of information (for example, 0, etc.) to the upper limit value (4) may be displayed. As described above, the specific effect may be any form of effect.

(22) As the change effect, any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information. For example, any effect may be used as long as the change of the effect mode in the various effects described above is executed according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information.

(23) The change effect is to change the effect mode in which the number of reach lines is increased according to the number of second reserved storage information, but the reach symbol is a reach symbol using a symbol other than the “7” symbol. There may be. As such a reach symbol, a special symbol other than the symbol included in the symbol sequence used for the normal variable display, for example, a symbol showing a character reminiscent of a state advantageous to the player, such as "RUSH". A symbol may be used.

(24) In the above-described embodiment, the game machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand when the prize is generated has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is paid to the player when the prize is generated. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out to the player may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. Game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the game ball, and game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize. The game machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of a prize has been explained, but the game medium is enclosed and the game point (the game point) without paying the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine that adds points) may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. Game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the game ball, and game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

(25) In the present embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and is, for example, a value in the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value containing 0%, a value containing 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

(26) The game states that are advantageous to the player are the big hit game state, the time saving state, the high base state, and the state in which the game state after the big hit game is more likely to be determined to be a big hit than the normal state. Any gaming state may be used as long as it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, such as a probability variation state.

(27) In the operation effect described above, as the detection means capable of detecting the operation (operation) of the player, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 capable of detecting the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player such as the stick controller 122. Such a detection means is shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player, other detecting means such as the push sensor 124 capable of detecting the operation of the push button 120 may be used to detect the operation of the operating means. A detection means that can directly detect the movement of the player, such as an infrared sensor and a motion sensor, may be used instead of the means for the operation.

(28) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims are included.

8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 1 pachinko game machine, 560
Game control microcomputer, 55 RAM, 9 production display device, 96 time saving remaining number of images.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in the first variable display means and the second variable display means.
It is more likely that the player will be more advantageous when the variable display in the second variable display means is executed than when the variable display in the first variable display means is executed.
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol is a predetermined result, it is provided with a variable winning means that changes from the closed state to the open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state.
The variable winning means can be controlled to a special state in which the open state is more likely to occur than in the normal state.
A special state termination means for terminating the special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, and
When controlled to the special state, the first flag is turned on, and in the final variable display in the special state, the first flag is turned off and the second flag is turned on at the start of the variable display. Further provided with a flag management means for turning off the second flag when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The special state termination means is a gaming machine characterized in that the special state is terminated based on the fact that the second flag is turned off.

Images